Kyocera FS 1128MFP 1028MFP/FS User Manual To The A2cb7774 1acb 4915 Af91 68ea0c69a1ad
User Manual: Kyocera FS-1128MFP to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 439
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
OPERATION GUIDE FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP FS-1100 FS-1300D Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition. Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy reference. We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine. This Operation Guide also includes instructions on FS-1028MFP/DP. Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary. Operation Guide (This Guide) Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting. Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below. WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points. CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points. Symbols The U symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol. .... [General warning] .... [Warning of danger of electrical shock] .... [Warning of high temperature] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol. .... [Warning of prohibited action] .... [Disassembly prohibited] The z symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol. .... [Alert of required action] .... [Remove the power plug from the outlet] .... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection] Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required). NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function. OPERATION GUIDE i Contents Contents Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Precautions for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii Laser Safety (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix 1 Part Names Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 2 Preparation before Use Check bundled items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Sending E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 3 Basic Operation Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 One-Touch Keys and Program Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Message Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Confirm Destination Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Checking Remaining Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Program (Copying and Sending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 4 Copying Functions Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 EcoPrint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 ii OPERATION GUIDE Contents Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 5 Sending Functions Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Sending Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Duplex Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Original Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Subject and Body Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 FTP Encrypted TX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Sanning Image using Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 6 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 7 Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56 Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 Document Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Printing Reports/Sending Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81 Adjustment/Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87 Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92 Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112 Restarting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127 Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128 Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-138 Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-146 Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-150 Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-151 OPERATION GUIDE iii Contents 9 Maintenance Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 10 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 11 Management User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 Appendix Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2 Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-5 Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-9 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-18 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-23 Index iv OPERATION GUIDE Caution / Warning Labels Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner. Laser inside the machine (Laser radiation warning) For U.S.A. and Canada For Europe, Asia, and other countries High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned. NOTE: Do not remove these labels. OPERATION GUIDE v Installation Precautions Environment CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the machine. Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Avoid locations near radiators, heaters or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger of fire. To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the rear cover, to allow air to be properly ventilated out of the machine. 500 mm (19 11/16") 300 mm (11 13/16") 300 mm (11 13/16") 300 mm (11 13/16") 1000 mm (39 3/8") Other precautions The service environmental conditions are as follows: • Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C) • Humidity: 15 to 80 % However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. • Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight. • Avoid locations with vibrations. • Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations. vi OPERATION GUIDE • Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. • Avoid poorly ventilated locations. If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated. Power supply/Grounding the machine WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock. Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine. A buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may cause a fire or electric shock. Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition. Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service representative. Other precautions Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine. Handling of plastic bags WARNING Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children. The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation. OPERATION GUIDE vii Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside. Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine. Do not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on the cord, pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury, fire, electrical shock or exposure to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing blindness. If the machine becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the machine, there is an odd smell, or any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power switch off immediately, be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative. If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the machine, turn the main power switch off immediately. Next, remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Then contact your service representative. Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock. Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts. viii OPERATION GUIDE CAUTION Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (Always grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet.) Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine. If the power cord is damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine. If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception. For safety purposes, always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations. If dust accumulates within the machine, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine. Other precautions Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine. Do not open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying. When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative. Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static electricity. Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful. OPERATION GUIDE ix Cautions when handling consumables CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children. If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin. • If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician. • If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician. • If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness, contact a physician. • If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water. Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box. If using the FS-1128MFP the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode. x OPERATION GUIDE Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it. OPERATION GUIDE xi Laser Safety (Europe) Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine. This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825. Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area. The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine. xii OPERATION GUIDE Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung! Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerät sind nur Funktionsschalter und können nicht verwendet werden, um den Stromfluß im Gerät zu unterbrechen. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY TO 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EEC, 93/68/EEC and 1999/5/EC We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications. EN55024 EN55022 Class B EN61000-3-2 EN61000-3-3 EN60950-1 EN60825-1 EN300 330-1 EN300 330-2 TBR21 Radio Frequency Transmitter This machine contains the transmitter module. We, the manufacturer hereby declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted. NOTE: Product marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol includes the battery that complies with the European Parliament and Council Directive 2006/66/EC (the "Battery Directive") in European Union. Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine. OPERATION GUIDE xiii SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) 1. Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape. 2. The CDRH Act A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this machine, the label is on the rear. xiv OPERATION GUIDE 3. Optical unit When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit. 4. Maintenance For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual. OPERATION GUIDE xv Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension. WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. • The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited. CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. * The above warning is valid only in the United States of America. Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted. MERCURY WARNING THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS. Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. xvi OPERATION GUIDE Warranty (USA) FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year, or 100,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor. This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the original MFP for a period of three years or 100,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty. This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase. In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area, or check Kyocera’s website at www.kyoceramita.com/us. This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights, which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP. OPERATION GUIDE xvii Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning • It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. • Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned. Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate • Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above. xviii OPERATION GUIDE Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics. • • • • • • • • Legal Information ........................................................... xx Regarding Trade Names............................................... xxi Energy Saving Control Function .................................. xxv Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ............................... xxv Paper Recycling........................................................... xxv Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program.................... xxv About this Operation Guide..........................................xxvi Conventions in This Guide.......................................... xxvii OPERATION GUIDE xix Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited. xx OPERATION GUIDE Regarding Trade Names • PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. • KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. • Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. • Windows Me, Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. • PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. • Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. • Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. • Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. • IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. • Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. • AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. • This machine has been developed using embedded real-time operating system Tornado™ by Wind River Systems, Inc. • TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. • TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®. • All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc. • Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG. • ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type-face Corporation. • UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine. • This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE xxi GPL Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access “http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available. Open SSLeay License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/ /www.openssl.org/)” 4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. xxii OPERATION GUIDE Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] OPERATION GUIDE xxiii Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. 2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement. 3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces. 4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original. 5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested. 6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded. 8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces. 9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement. 10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging. 11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2). 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. xxiv OPERATION GUIDE Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time. Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 2 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer to Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4. Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5. Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3-14. Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types. Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program. OPERATION GUIDE xxv About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters. Chapter 1 - Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use. Chapter 3 - Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning. Chapter 4 - Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying. Chapter 5 - Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals. Chapter 6 - Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes. Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu) Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation. Chapter 9 - Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement. Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems. Chapter 11 - Management Explains user login administration and job accounting. Also describes the procedure for Data Security Kit installation. Appendix Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications. Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine. Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms. xxvi OPERATION GUIDE Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen. Press the Start key. [Regular] Indicates a selection item on the Message Display. Select [System]. Italic Indicates a message displayed on the Message Display. Ready to copy is displayed. Used to emphasize a key word, phrase or references to additional information. For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5. Note Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference. NOTE: Important Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems. IMPORTANT: Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it. CAUTION: Caution OPERATION GUIDE xxvii xxviii OPERATION GUIDE 1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys. • • Operation Panel ............................................................1-2 Machine ........................................................................1-4 OPERATION GUIDE 1-1 Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Address Book screen, where you can add, edit and delete destinations. Displays the System Menu/Counter menu screen, where you can check the system settings and counters. Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX number.* Displays the Confirm Destination screen, where you can edit and delete destinations. Displays the Status screen, where you can check the status, print a status report, and pause or cancel the job in process. Displays the Add Destination screen, where you can add destinations. Displays the Copy screen, where you can make settings required for copying. Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually sending a FAX.* Message Display. Check what is shown here while operating the machine. Selects the menu displayed at the lower right in the Message Display. Blinks while data is transmitted. Displays the FAX screen, where you can send a FAX.* Displays the Send screen, where you can send an e-mail, folder (SMB/FTP) or FAX.* Displays the Document Box screen, where you can operate the document box and USB memory. Blinks during printing operation. Selects the menu displayed at the lower left in the Message Display. Used to call destinations registered to the one-touch key numbers (1 to 22). Shifts to switch the one-touch key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to 22). Lamp is lit while shifted (12 to 22). * 1-2 FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. OPERATION GUIDE Part Names 1 Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when entering characters, change a value, etc. Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered value. Displays the function menu for copy, print, transmission and document box. Clears entered numbers and characters. Resets settings and displays the basic screen. Turns the machine on/off. Also used to put it into or recover it from sleep mode. Lit when the machine's main power is on. Numeric keys. Enter numbers and symbols. Returns the Message Display to the previous screen. Lights or blinks when an error occurs. Blinks while the machine is accessing the memory. OPERATION GUIDE Ends operation (logs out) on the Administration screen. Used to register or recall programs. Cancels the printing job in progress. Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations. 1-3 Part Names Machine 7 8 1 3 2 4 5 6 9 10 1 Original Cover (For FS-1028MFP only) 2 Platen 3 Original Size Indicator Plate 4 Operation Panel 5 Top Cover 6 Front Cover 7 Drum Unit 8 Main Charger Cleaner 9 Lock Lever 10 Toner Container 1-4 OPERATION GUIDE Part Names 1 11 12 13 16 16 14 15 17 18 11 Top Tray 12 Paper Length Guide 13 Paper Stopper 14 Paper Width Guides 15 Cassette 16 Paper Width Guides (MP Tray) 17 MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray 18 MP Tray Extension OPERATION GUIDE 1-5 Part Names 19 20 22 21 23 24 19 Anchor Pin 20 USB Interface Connector 21 Network Interface Connector 22 Rear Cover 23 Main Power Switch 24 Power Cord Connector 1-6 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals. • • • • • • • • • • • Check bundled items .........................................................2-2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables.......2-3 Connecting Cables........................................................2-5 Switching the Language for Display [Language]...........2-7 Setting Date and Time ..................................................2-9 Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ....................2-12 Installing Software.......................................................2-24 COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ................2-25 Sending E-mail............................................................2-26 Loading Paper.............................................................2-28 Loading Originals ........................................................2-44 OPERATION GUIDE 2-1 Preparation before Use Check bundled items Check that the following items have been bundled. • Printed material • CD-ROM(Product Library) • CD-ROM(TWAIN compatible application) Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary. Documents KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference 2-2 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables. 2 Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below. Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) COMMAND CENTER Administrator’s PC Network Network settings, Scanner default settings, User and destination registration Send E-mail Sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E-mail message. MFP Printing Network USB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC. Network Network Network FAX Send SMB Network Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP. FAX TWAIN Scanning FAX USB WIA Scanning * FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. OPERATION GUIDE USB TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices. 2-3 Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use. Available Standard Interfaces Function Necessary Cable Printer/Scanner /Network FAX* Network interface LAN (10Base-T or 100Base-TX, Shielded) Printer/TWAIN Scanning/WIA Scanning USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max. 5.0 m, Shielded) * 2-4 Interface Network FAX and FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine. 1 Turn the main power switch off (O). 2 Connect the machine to the PC or your network device. When using the network interface, remove the cap.. 3 Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet. 2 IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine. OPERATION GUIDE 2-5 Preparation before Use 2-6 4 Turn the main power switch on (|). The machine begins to warm up. 5 When connecting the network cable, configure the network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-12. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the Message Display. 2 Use the procedure below to select the language. 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] a b Language: 1 *English ********************* 2 Deutsch 3 Français OPERATION GUIDE Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 3 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Language]. 5 Press the OK key. Language appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired language and then press the OK key. 2-7 Preparation before Use Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. 2-8 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used. NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time. 1 Turn on the main power switch. 2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 2-9 2 Preparation before Use Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting]. 6 A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. 7 Press the OK key. The Date Setting menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone]. 9 Press the OK key. Time Zone appears. ] Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] Time Zone: a b 1 -12:00 Internati ********************* 2 -11:00 Midway 3 -10:00 Hawaii 10 Press the U or V key to select your region and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu. Date Setting: a b 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone 4 Summer Time ********************* [ Exit ] Summer Time: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 11 Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time]. 12 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears. 13 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. 2-10 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu. Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] a b Date/Time: Year Month Day 2009 01 01 (Time Zone:Tokyo ) 14 Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time]. 2 15 Press the OK key. Date/Time appears. 16 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position, press the U or V key to enter year, month and day, and then press the OK key. Date/Time: a b Hour Min. Second 45: 50 11: (Time Zone:Tokyo ) Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time 2 Date Format ********************* 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] a b Date Format: 1 *Month/Day/Year ********************* 2 Day/Month/Year 3 Year/Month/Day 17 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position, press the U or V key to enter hours, minutes and seconds, and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu. 18 Press the U or V key to select [Date Format]. 19 Press the OK key. Date Format appears. 20 Press the U or V key to select the desired display format and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu. OPERATION GUIDE 2-11 Preparation before Use Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms. This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to Network Setup on page 8-128. • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup ...2-12 • AppleTalk Setup ...2-22 TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off". NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator. Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting. 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 2-12 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and then press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Administrator only. IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. The default settings of the login user name and login password are both 2800. If you have logged in using a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. and return to the standby screen. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] a b TCP/IP: 1 Off 2 *On ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP]. 8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears. 2-13 2 Preparation before Use 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP 2 IPv4 Setting ********************* 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Bonjour 3 IP Address [ Exit ] 10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting]. 11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears. 12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP]. a b DHCP: 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears. 14 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. a b IPv4 Setting: 1 DHCP 2 Bonjour ********************* 3 IP Address [ Exit ] a b Bonjour: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 2-14 15 Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour]. 16 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 17 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP 2 Bonjour 3 IP Address ********************* [ Exit ] IP Address: a b 18 Press the U or V key to select [IP Address]. 19 Press the OK key. IP Address appears. 123.145.167.189 20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address. Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the IP Address. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255. IP Address: b IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is [On], the current IP address is displayed and cannot be changed. 123.145.167.189 When setting an IP address, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) to Off. 21 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. IPv4 Setting: a b 3 IP Address 4 Subnet Mask ********************* 5 Default Gateway [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 22 Press the U or V key to select [Subnet Mask]. 2-15 2 Preparation before Use Subnet Mask: a b 23 Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears. 123.145.167.189 24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255. IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is [On], the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed. When setting an Subnet Mask, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) to Off. 25 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. IPv4 Setting: a b 3 IP Address 4 Subnet Mask 5 Default Gateway ********************* [ Exit ] Default Gateway: a b 26 Press the U or V key to select [Default Gateway]. 27 Press the OK key. Default Gateway appears. 123.145.167.189 28 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway. Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position horizontally. Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Default Gateway. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255. 2-16 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is [On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed. 2 When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) to Off. 29 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. OPERATION GUIDE 2-17 Preparation before Use DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting. 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] Administrator only. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and then press the OK key. IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. If you have logged in using a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. and return to the standby screen. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 2-18 3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] a b TCP/IP: 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 2 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP]. 8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP 2 IPv4 Setting ********************* 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP ********************* 2 Bonjour 3 IP Address [ Exit ] 10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting]. 11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears. 12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP]. OPERATION GUIDE 2-19 Preparation before Use DHCP: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears. 14 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting. 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] Administrator only. Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and then press the OK key. IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. If you have logged in using a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. and return to the standby screen. 2-20 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] a b TCP/IP: 1 Off ********************* 2 *On 3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 2 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP]. 8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP 2 IPv4 Setting ********************* 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting]. 2-21 Preparation before Use IPv4 Setting: a b 1 DHCP 2 Bonjour ********************* 3 IP Address [ Exit ] 11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears. 12 Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour]. a b Bonjour: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 13 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears. 14 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting. 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu 2-22 ] [ Login ] Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] Administrator only. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and then press the OK key. 2 IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges. If you have logged in using a user ID without administrator privileges, the screen will display Administrator only. and return to the standby screen. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] a b AppleTalk 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [AppleTalk]. 6 Press the OK key. AppleTalk appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. OPERATION GUIDE 2-23 Preparation before Use Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC. NOTE: Installation on Windows XP, Windows 2000, Server 2003 and Windows Vista must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep Mode before continuing. See Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. 2-24 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking. NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below. 1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address. E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/ The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status. 3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be set separately. If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct password to access pages other than the startup page. The default setting is admin00. The password can be changed. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE 2-25 2 Preparation before Use Sending E-mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following: • The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended. SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails. Sender address • • • The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below. 1 Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General. 2-26 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 2 Enter the correct settings in each field. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below. Item SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be enabled. SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25. SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab. SMTP Server Timeout 3 2 Description Enter the default time out for the server in seconds. Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000. Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account. Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters. Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters. POP before SMTP Timeout Enter the timeout (in seconds) if you chose POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol. Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established. E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is 0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled. Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters. Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters. Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses. Click Submit. OPERATION GUIDE 2-27 Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2). Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps. 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle. 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled. 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers. 4 Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table. If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam. CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality. NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled, turn the stack in the cassette upside down. Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag. If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name, refer to Paper on Appendix-9. 2-28 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). The following paper sizes are supported: Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Executive, Statement, A4, B5, A5, A6, Folio, and 16K. IMPORTANT: • You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults.) • When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-38) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g/m2. • Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 120 g/m2. 1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine. IMPORTANT: When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out. 2 OPERATION GUIDE Press the bottom plate down until it locks. 2-29 2 Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab on the left guide and slide the guides to the paper size required. NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette. 4 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4, pull out the extension paper cassette by pushing the release lever one by one and adjust it to the desired paper size. 2-30 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 5 Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to be printed is facing down and the paper is not folded, curled, or damaged. 2 IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide. • Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. • Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below). • When loading the paper, keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. • The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams. • Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper. 6 OPERATION GUIDE Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine. Push it straight in as far as it will go. 2-31 Preparation before Use There is a paper gauge on the left side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the pointer will go down to the level of (empty). NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. 7 Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-38.) Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement-R, and 16K. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper. IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick. The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows. • A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets • Hagaki: 15 sheets • OHP film: 1 sheet • Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 1 sheet NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. 2-32 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. 2 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Pull out the subtray. 3 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. 2-33 Preparation before Use 4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be uncurled before use. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray. Loading Envelopes 1 envelope may be loaded in the multi purpose tray. Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows. Acceptable Envelope 2-34 Size Hagaki 148×100 (mm) Oufuku Hagaki 148×200 (mm) Youkei 2 162×114 (mm) Youkei 4 235×105 (mm) Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2" Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2" Envelope DL 110×220 (mm) Envelope C5 162×229 (mm) Executive 7 1/4"×10 1/2" Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) 3 7/8"×8 7/8" Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) 3 5/8"×6 1/2" ISO B5 176×250 (mm) OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. 2 OPERATION GUIDE 2 Pull out the subtray. 3 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. 2-35 Preparation before Use 4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. 5 For landscape form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing towards you. For portrait form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot. When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up. Close the flap. Landscape form envelopes Portrait form envelopes Cardstock (Hagaki) Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki) NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki). 2-36 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face. NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. OPERATION GUIDE 2-37 2 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassette, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) is [Letter], and the default media type setting is [Plain]. To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-38.) To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41.) Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3), specify the paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting. Selection Item Selectable Size/Type Paper Size Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, and 16K Media Type Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality and Custom 1~8* * To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu 2-38 ] [ Login ] Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 3 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1 Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.]. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are shown when the optional cassettes are installed. Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette (Cassette 2 or 3). Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [ OPERATION GUIDE Exit 7 Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size]. ] 2-39 Preparation before Use Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa 9 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu. Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size 2 Cassette 1 Type ********************* [ Exit 11 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type]. ] Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled 12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears. 13 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu. 2-40 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a plain paper, specify the media type. Item Paper Size Standard Sizes Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, and Oficio II Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size X (Horizontal): 5.83~14.02" (in 0.01" increments), Y (Vertical): 2.75~8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Metric size X (Horizontal): 148~356 mm (in 1mm increments), Y (Vertical): 80~216 mm (in 1mm increments) Media Type * 2 Description Selectable media types are as follows. Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality and Custom 1~8* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available media types are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough 1 OPERATION GUIDE Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2-41 Preparation before Use When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] a b MP Tray Set.: 1 MP Tray Size ********************* 2 MP Tray Type [ 2-42 Exit NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 3 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.]. 7 Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size]. ] OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use MP Tray Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa Others: a b 1 *ISO B5a ********************* 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 Size Entry(Y): D b (5.83 - 14.02) x ***11.49*" 9 Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears. 2 10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. If you select [Others], select one of the other options and then press the OK key. If you select [Size Entry], use the numeric keys to enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key, and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu. MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size 2 MP Tray Type ********************* [ Exit 11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type]. ] MP Tray Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough 12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears. 13 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu. OPERATION GUIDE 2-43 Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing. Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals. 1 Open the original cover. NOTE: If the optional document processor (DP-110) is installed, open the document processor. Before opening the document processor, be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened. Keep the document processor open if the original is 30 mm or thicker. 2 Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. 3 Close the original cover. IMPORTANT: Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass. Do not close the document processor when the original is 30 mm or thicker. The connector of the document processor will be removed form the machine. NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals. CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury. 2-44 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. 2 Part Names of the Document Processor (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Top cover (2) Original width guides (3) Original table (4) Original eject table (5) Original stopper (6) Opening handle (6) Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals. Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2) Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement Capacity Plain paper, Colored paper, Recycled paper, High quality paper: 50 sheets Thick paper (110 g/m2): 36 sheets Thick paper (120 g/m2): 33 sheets Art paper: 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. • Soft originals such as vinyl sheets • Transparencies such as OHP film • Carbon paper • Originals with very slippery surfaces • Originals with adhesive tape or glue • Wet originals • Originals with correction fluid which is not dried • Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals • Originals with cut-out sections • Crumpled paper • Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam). • Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam). OPERATION GUIDE 2-45 Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam. 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals. 2 Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam. Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure). Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first). 2-46 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Power On/Off ................................................................3-2 Auto Low Power Mode..................................................3-4 Sleep and Auto Sleep ...................................................3-5 Login/Logout .................................................................3-6 One-Touch Keys and Program Keys.............................3-7 Message Display...........................................................3-8 Copying.........................................................................3-9 Printing - Printing from Applications............................3-18 Sending.......................................................................3-20 Confirm Destination Screen .......................................3-27 Specifying Destination ................................................3-28 Canceling Jobs ...........................................................3-31 Checking Remaining Toner and Paper .......................3-32 Program (Copying and Sending) ................................3-33 OPERATION GUIDE 3-1 Basic Operation Power On/Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit... Press the Power key. When the main power indicator is off... Turn the main power switch on. IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch. 3-2 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Power Off Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. Memory 3 Make sure that the indicators are off. In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception. CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity. OPERATION GUIDE 3-3 Basic Operation Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for 2 minutes. 3-4 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Message Display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep. If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the Message Display remains unlit. 3 If you are using the FS-1128MFP, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit. To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be ready to operate in about 15 seconds. Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly. Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode if left idle for 15 minutes. OPERATION GUIDE 3-5 Basic Operation Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine. NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, log in with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 1 If the screen shown appears during operations, enter the login user name. 2 Press the V key. The input cursor moves to Login Password. 3 Enter the login password. ] Press the U key to move the input cursor to Login User Name. 4 Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. Logout To logout from the machine, press the Logout to return to the login user name/password entry screen. 3-6 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation One-Touch Keys and Program Keys The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below. One-Touch Key Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-124. Entering Destination with One-touch Key Address Entry: * [ ABC Text B b 1 In Address Entry, press the one-touch key where the desired destination is registered. Recalling from One-touch Keys 1 to 11 Press the one-touch key where the destination is registered. ] Recalling from One-touch Keys 12 to 22 Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the lamp next to the keys, and then press the one-touch key where the destination is registered. Address Entry A b 5y@kyoceramita.co.jp* ABC [ Text ] 2 The destination registered to the one-touch key is recalled and automatically entered on the screen. IMPORTANT: Any destination already entered is overwritten. Program Keys Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing the applicable program key. For registering settings to a program key, refer to Program (Copying and Sending) on page 3-33. OPERATION GUIDE 3-7 3 Basic Operation Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display. Ready to copy. Copies: 1 A4q sA A4a 100% [ Zoom ] [ ] 1 2 3 4 5 1 6 7 Copier Screen Reference number 3-8 Ready to send. Dest.: 1 p :sally@kyoceramitaN 1-sided [ Duplex ] [ ] 8 9 4 5 Send Screen Meaning 1 Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current menu whenever the operation panel is being used. 2 Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed. The meaning of each icon is as indicated below. A The standard paper cassette is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as G , there is no paper is the cassette. B C The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as H or I , there is no paper is the cassette. F The MP Tray is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as L , there is no paper is the MP Tray. 3 Displays the size of the original(s). 4 Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be selected using the left or right Select keys. 5 Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the left or right Select keys. 6 Displays the number of copies. 7 Displays the paper size to be copied. 8 Displays the number of destinations. 9 Displays the destination. OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying. 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off. NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor. NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading Originals on page 2-44. Ready to copy. Copies: 1 Letterq sA Lettera 100% [ Zoom ] [ Paper ] 3 The paper source for copying is the location displayed on the panel. Paper source When you need to change the paper source, use the Paper Selection menu. If [Auto] is selected, the most suitable paper source is automatically selected. Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A A4a Plain 3 B A5a Plain For specifying the paper source, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-4. 4 OPERATION GUIDE Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. Specify the desired number up to 999. 3-9 3 Basic Operation 5 Press the Start key to start copying. 6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray. Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying. Density Adjustment Option Description Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original. NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-37). The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] Density: a b 1 Auto 2 *Manual ********************* 3-10 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Density]. 3 Press the OK key. Density appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Manual: a b 1 u Lighter -3 ********************* 2 v Lighter -2 3 w Lighter -1 5 Press the OK key. When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears. Press the U or V key to select your desired density and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Start key. Copying begins. Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Image Quality Option Description Text+Photo For originals with both text and photographs. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Text For originals primarily consisting of text. The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ] Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image]. 3 Press the OK key. Original Image appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select the image quality suited to the type of original. 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Start key. Copying begins. 3-11 3 Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available. Auto Zoom Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size. Ledger: 129 % Letter-R A3: 141 % Statement-R: 64 % A4 A5: 70 % Zoom Entry Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. 25 % 400 % Standard Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications. The following magnifications are available. Model Inch Models Metric Models 3-12 Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement), 50%, 25% (Min.) Other 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5) Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.) Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 90% (Folio >> A4), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement) OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Model Metric Models (Asia Pacific) Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.) Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement) 3 The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto 3 Standard Zoom 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom]. 3 Press the OK key. Zoom appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired magnification. To copy in the same size as the original, select [100%]. To select automatic zoom, select [Auto]. a b Standard Zoom: 1 400% ********************* 2 200% 3 141% A5 >> A4 Zoom Entry: (25 - 400) *****200% OPERATION GUIDE D b To use fixed magnifications, select [Standard Zoom] and press the OK key. Standard Zoom appears. Press the U or V key to select the desired magnification. If you select [Other] and press the OK key, you can select from additional magnifications. To enter a magnification, select [Zoom Entry] and press the OK key. Zoom Entry appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the any magnification. 3-13 Basic Operation 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Start key. Copying begins. Duplex Copying Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books. The following modes are available. One-sided to Two-sided 5 4 5 Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank. 3 3 4 1 2 2 1 Original Copy A ghi def ghi abc abc def abc The following binding options are available. B ghi A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. def Original B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation when turning the pages. Copy Two-sided to One-sided 1 1 2 2 Original Copy Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. The optional document processor is required. The following binding options are available. • • 3-14 Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180°. OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Two-sided to Two-sided 5 5 3 3 Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional document processor is required. 4 4 1 1 2 2 Original Copy NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Executive, A4, B5, A5 and Folio. The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] Duplex: a b 1 *1-sided>>1-sided ********************* 2 1-sided>>2-sided 3 2-sided>>1-sied 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. 3 Press the OK key. Duplex appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired duplex copying mode. NOTE: [2-sided>>1-sided] and [2-sided>>2-sided] are shown only when the optional document processor (DP-110) is installed. Finish. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left OPERATION GUIDE If you select [1-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the finished copies and the original setting orientation. After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the finished copies and the original setting orientation. 3-15 3 Basic Operation If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the original and the original setting orientation. Orig. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the original and finished copies, and the original setting orientation. Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left If you select [2-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and you can select the binding edge of the original and the original setting orientation. Orig. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the finished copies and the original setting orientation. Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge of the original and finished copies, and the original setting orientation. Orig.Orientation: a b 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* 2 d Top Edge left Scanning... Job No.: Page(s): [ Cancel ] 3-16 9999 1 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Start key. Copying begins. If the original is placed on the platen, replace it with the next one before pressing the Start key. OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation If there is no next original, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). Copying begins. Set original and press Start key. Job No.: 9999 Page(s): 3 [ Cancel ] [End Scan] 3 Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies. You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below. 3 2 1 3 Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number. 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 Original Copy The procedure for using collate copying is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ] Collate: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Collate]. 3 Press the OK key. Collate appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 6 Press the Start key Copying begins. 3-17 Basic Operation Printing - Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications. NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD-ROM (Product Library). 1 Create a document using an application. 2 Click File and select Print in the application. The Print dialog box appears. 3 Click the T button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list. 4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. Enter any number up to 999. When there is more than one document, select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers. 5 3-18 Click Properties button. The Properties dialog box appears. OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation 6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the Media Type menu and select the media type. 3 7 Click Source and select the paper source. NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type. To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray. 8 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or Landscape, to match the orientation of the document. Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document rotated 180°. 9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box. 10 Click OK button to start printing. OPERATION GUIDE 3-19 Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network. A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box. To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps: • Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine. • Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the SMTP server, and the recipient. • Register the destination in the Address Book or One-touch keys. • When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up the PC Folder, contact your administrator. • Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time) Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available. • Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-21 • Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-23 • Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-23 • Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC...Refer to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-30. 3-20 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Send as E-mail Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. NOTE: • You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN. • Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For details, see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-25. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. 1 Press the Send key. Displays the screen for sending. Send to: a b 1 p E-mail ********************* 2 G Folder(SMB) 3 H Folder(FTP) Address Entry: * [ ABC Text B b 2 Press the U or V key to select [E-mail]. 3 Press the OK key. Address Entry appears. 4 Enter the destination e-mail address. ] NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28. Ready to send. Dest.: 1 p :sally@kyoceramitaN 1-sided 300x300dpi [ Duplex ] [ScanRes.] OPERATION GUIDE 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-64) is set to [On], a screen to confirm the entered e-mail address appears. Enter the same e-mail address again and press the OK key. 3-21 3 Basic Operation 6 If there are additional destinations, press the Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. 7 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations. Press the U or V key to select a destination and press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the destination. Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@kyoceramitaN ********************* p aaaaaaaaa@kyoceramN p bbbbbbbbb@kyoceramN [ Exit ] Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen. 8 Press the Start key. Transmission starts. NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3-27. 3-22 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP) Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC. Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. NOTE: 3 • Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder. • Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. 1 Press the Send key. Displays the screen for sending. Send to: a b 1 p E-mail 2 G Folder(SMB) ********************* 3 H Folder(FTP) Host Name(SMB): Osaka SD* [ ABC Text A b ] or Host Name(FTP): Osaka SD* [ ABC Text 2 Press the U or V key to select [Folder(SMB)] or [Folder(FTP)]. 3 Press the OK key. Host Name(SMB) or Host Name(FTP) appears. 4 Enter the host name. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28. A b ] 5 OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key. Path appears. 3-23 Basic Operation A b Path: SD3\report* [ ABC Text Login User Name: Maury* [ ABC Text Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO* [ ABC Text 6 Enter the path name. Consider, that the share name but not the foldername on the destination pc has to be typed in. 7 Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. 8 Enter the login user name. You have to enter the account name of the destination pc. 9 Press the OK key. Login Password appears. ] C b S ] A b ] 10 Enter the login password (account on the destination pc.) Check the connection. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No 11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. ] NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-64) is set to [On], screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear. Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens. Data to be entered are as follows. NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password. 3-24 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation For send to folder (SMB) Item Data to be entered Max. characters Host Name (SMB)* Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data. Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows. For example, User\Sharename. Up to 128 characters Login User Name User name to access the PC For example, abcdnet\james.smith Up to 64 characters Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters * 3 To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format “host name: port number” (e.g., SMBhostname: 140). For send to folder (FTP) Item Data to be entered Max. characters Host Name (FTP)* Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder. For example, User\ScanData. Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory. Up to 128 characters Login User Name FTP server log-in user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server log-in password Up to 64 characters * To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name: port number” (e.g., FTPhostname: 140). Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@kyoceramitaN b 0667640000 ********************* b 0667741234 [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a connection with the entered destination. 3-25 Basic Operation If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 3 reappears. Check and reenter the destination. 13 If there are additional destinations, press the Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. Dest. Confirm.: a b H OSAKA SD ********************* G EI5 G PT10 [ Exit ] 14 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations. Press the U or V key to select a destination and press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the destination. Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen. 15 Press the Start key. Transmission starts. NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3-27. 3-26 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], Check through the all destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed. Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen. Destination List: a b p Morgan@kyoceramitaN ********************* b 0667640000 b 0667741234 [ Cancel ] [ Next ] 1 Press the U or V key to check all destinations. Press the OK key to edit or delete the selected destination. To add a destination, press [Cancel] (the Left Select key) to return to the previous screen. p Morgan@kyoceramNa b 1 Detail 2 Delete Set original and press Start key. 2 After the checking is finished, press [Next] (the Right Select key). Set original and press Start key. is displayed on the screen. [ Cancel ] If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet checked, the screen displays Check the destination list through the end. and returns to the Destination List screen. Check all destinations. Check the destination list through the end. 3 OPERATION GUIDE Place the original on the platen and press the Start key. Transmission starts. 3-27 3 Basic Operation Specifying Destination When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys. Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. Select Addr Book: a b t Address Book ********************* t Ext Address Book [ Exit 1 In the basic screen for sending, press the Address Book key. The Select Addr Book menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and then press the OK key. Address Book appears. ] Address Book: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] To use an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext Address Book]. NOTE: If external address book is not registered, [Ext Address Book] is not displayed. 3 Press the U or V key to select the desired user or group, and then press the OK key. If you select a user, the list of destinations registered to the user appears. l Fiala: a b b 0667643277 ********************* p fiala@kyoceramita.N H SMB-PC [ Menu ] If you select a group, proceed to step 5. 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and then press the OK key. 5 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below. 3-28 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Search in Address Book Menu: a b 1 Select ********************* 2 Detail 3 Search(Name) 1 In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears. 3 a b Address Book: k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] A b Search(Name): ma* S [ ABC Text 2 Press the U or V key to select [Search(Name)] and then press the OK key. A search screen appears. 3 Enter the characters you want to search. 4 Press the OK key. The address book appears with the user that starts with the entered character string at the top. 1 In Ext Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Search] and then press the OK key. A search screen appears. ] Address Book: a b l Maury ********************* l Morgan l Sally [ Menu ] Search in External Address Book Ext Address Book: a b l Fiala ********************* l Maury l Morgan [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Select 2 Detail 3 Search ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 3-29 Basic Operation Search(Name): ma* S [ Menu ] [ A b ABC Text 3 If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and then the OK key, Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition. Select the desired item for each and then press the OK key. ] Ext Address Book: a b l Maury ********************* l Morgan l Sally [ Menu ] Enter the characters you want to search. 4 Press the OK key. The address book appears with the user that starts with the entered character string at the top. NOTE: If you first open the extended address book, the search screen appears first. Then, operate from step 3. Choosing by One-Touch Key Select the destination using the One-touch keys. In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry screen, press the one-touch key where the destination is registered. NOTE: Refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-124 for more information on adding one-touch keys. Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers. This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation. No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100 Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 1 SMB and FTP FAX : Up to 100 Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time. Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time. 3-30 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed. Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. Job Cancel List: a b 1 Print Job List ********************* 2 Send Job List 3 Store Job List [ Exit ] Print Job List: a b 0008 r Copy s ********************** 0009 W maury's data s 0010 W MicrosoftworN s [ Resume ] [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail ********************* 2 Cancel Job Job will be canceled. Are you sure? z 0008 r Copy [ Yes ] [ No 1 During a printing or sending job, press the Stop key. The Job Cancel List menu appears. NOTE: Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job but does not pause a sending job. 2 Press the U or V key to select the type of job you want to stop, and then press the OK key. An output queue of the selected job type is displayed. 3 Press the U or V key to select the job you want to stop, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Cancel Job] and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. 5 Press [Yes] (the Right Select key). The screen displays Canceling.... and returns to the output queue of the selected job type after the job is canceled. ] To cancel other jobs, repeat steps 3 to 5. OPERATION GUIDE 3-31 3 Basic Operation Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette. Checking Remaining Toner Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Toner Status: b 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Toner Status]. 3 Press the OK key. Toner Status appears. The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one of 10 levels. 0% VVVVEEEEEE 100% Checking Remaining Paper Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Paper Status: Cassette 1: Lettera Plain 3-32 C b 1/ 4 Empty 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Status]. 3 Press the OK key. Paper Status appears. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display of remaining paper amount among the main unit cassette, optional cassette (if installed) and MP tray. OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Program (Copying and Sending) Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys. Registering Settings After making settings, press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the settings for 3 seconds. The current settings are registered to the selected program key. Registered. z Program 1 Changing and Deleting Settings Menu: a b 1 Overwrite ********************* 2 Delete Overwrite. Are you sure? z Program 1 [ Yes ] [ No Yes ] [ Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to change/delete are registered for 3 seconds. Menu appears. 2 To replace the registered settings with the current settings, press the U or V key to select [Overwrite] and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to change the settings. ] To delete the registered settings, press the U or V key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to delete the registered settings. Delete. Are you sure? z Program 1 [ 1 No ] Recalling Settings Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings. OPERATION GUIDE 3-33 3 Basic Operation 3-34 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying. • • • • • • • • • Original Size......................................................................................... 4-2 Paper Selection.................................................................................... 4-4 Original Orientation .............................................................................. 4-8 EcoPrint ............................................................................................. 4-10 Combine Mode................................................................................... 4-11 Continuous Scan................................................................................ 4-15 Job Finish Notice ............................................................................... 4-16 File Name Entry ................................................................................. 4-18 Print Override..................................................................................... 4-19 OPERATION GUIDE 4-1 Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process. The following options are available. Item How to Select Sizes Standard Sizes Select from standard sizes. Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Officio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K Others Select from envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals*. ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom * For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8. Use the procedure below to select the original size. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] Original Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq 4-2 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Original Size]. 5 Press the OK key. Original Size appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions If you select [Others], select one of the other options and then press the OK key. Others: a b 1 *ISO B5q ********************* 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 7 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Press the Start key to start copying. 4-3 Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size. NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8). Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A Lettera Plain 3 B Customa Plain 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection]. 5 Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size. If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 8 4-4 Press the Start key to start copying. OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Category Paper Size Media Type * ** *** Item How to Select Sizes Standard Sizes Select from the standard size. Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K * Others Select from envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2**. Inch models Horizontal: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) 4 Metric models Vertical: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments), Horizontal: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size (Custom), refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11. The input units can be changed in the System menu. Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-27. For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24. NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-15). Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type. OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 4-5 Copying Functions Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ] Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A A4a Plain 3 B A5a Plain a b MP Tray Set.: 1 *Standard Size ********************* 2 Others 3 Size Entry 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection]. 5 Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.]. 7 Press the OK key. MP Tray Set. appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Standard Size], [Others] or [Size Entry] and press the OK key, select the desired paper size, and then press the OK key. If you select [Size Entry], using the numeric keys to enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key, and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the OK key. D b Size Entry(Y): (5.83 - 14.02) x 11.49 " ****** Media Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough 9 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 10 Place paper in the multi purpose tray. 11 Press the Start key to start copying. 4-6 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions If Add paper in MP tray. is displayed during the copying process, add paper in the multi purpose tray, and then press the OK key. Copying then resumes. 4 OPERATION GUIDE 4-7 Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions. • Duplex • Combine mode When placing originals on the platen [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] When placing originals on the optional document processor [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-30. 4-8 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ] Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation]. 5 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Press the Start key to start copying. 4-9 Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint]. 5 Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 7 4-10 Press the Start key to start copying. OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be indicated. NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement and 16K. 2-in-1 Mode 4 For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet. The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order. OPERATION GUIDE 4-11 Copying Functions 4-in-1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order. 4-12 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available. 4 None Solid Dotted Positioning Mark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ] Combine: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 2 in 1 3 4 in 1 [ Detail ] 2 in 1 Layout: a b 1 *g L to R f T to B ********************* 2 e R to L OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Combine]. 5 Press the OK key. Combine appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [2 in1] or [4 in 1]. 7 Press [Detail] (the Right Select key). 8 Press the U or V key to select the desired layout and then press the OK key. 4-13 Copying Functions Border Line: a b 1 * None ********************* 2 l Solid Line 3 m Dotted Line Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* 9 Press the U or V key to select the desired border line type and then press the OK key. 10 Press the U or V key to select the orientation of the original and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 11 Press the Start key. Scanning begins. If the original is placed on the platen, replace the original and press the Start key. After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying. 4-14 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T T 3 Duplex [ Exit ] Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan]. 4 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 6 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key. 7 Place the next original and press the Start key. Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals. After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying. OPERATION GUIDE 4-15 4 Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish. NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. Example of Job Finish Notice To: h_pttr@owl-net.net Subject: 1234 Job end report mail Job No.: 000002 Result: OK End Time: Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08 File Name: doc27042005145608 Job Type: Copy -----------------------------------------------1234 [00:c0:ee:d0:01:14] ------------------------------------------------ Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4-16 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice]. OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On Destination: a b 1 *Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry Address Book: a b p Fiala ********************* p Maury p Morgan [ Menu ] 5 Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or [Address Entry], and then press the OK key. 8 If you select [Address Book], select [Address Book] on the next screen and press the OK key, and then select the notice destination. Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination. If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of the notice destination. Address Entry: B b ******@abcdefg.jp [ ABC Text NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix] 5 for details on entering characters. 9 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 10 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the selected destination. OPERATION GUIDE 4-17 4 Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] File Name Entry: A b File_2009* S ABC [ Text ] 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry]. 5 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. 6 Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional Info. appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix5 for details on entering characters. 7 Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and then press the OK key. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix5 for details on entering characters. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 8 4-18 Press the Start key to start copying. OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job. NOTE: If the machine is left for 60 seconds in the interruption copy mode, the interrupt copy job is automatically canceled and the print job resumed. Function Menu: a b 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] Print Override: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Override]. 3 Press the OK key. Print Override appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [On]. 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed, the machine is put into the interruption copy mode, and the basic screen appears. 6 Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion as a normal copy job. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job. 4-19 4 Copying Functions 4-20 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Original Size..................................................................5-2 Sending Size.................................................................5-4 Zoom.............................................................................5-6 Duplex Sending.............................................................5-7 Original Orientation .......................................................5-8 File Format..................................................................5-10 Original Image.............................................................5-12 Adjusting Density ........................................................5-13 Scan Resolution..........................................................5-14 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection ...........5-15 Continuous Scan.........................................................5-16 File Name Entry ..........................................................5-17 Subject and Body Entry ..............................................5-18 WSD Scan ..................................................................5-19 Job Finish Notice ........................................................5-21 FTP Encrypted TX ......................................................5-23 OPERATION GUIDE 5-1 Sending Functions Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process. Choose the original size from the following groups of original size. Item Detail Size Standard Sizes Select from standard sizes. Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Officio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K Others Select from Hagaki and Custom Original Size *. ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom * Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size, refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8. Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Original Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq 5-2 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Original Size]. 5 Press the OK key. Original Size appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions If you select [Others], select one of the other options and then press the OK key. Others: a b 1 *ISO B5q ********************* 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 7 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5 OPERATION GUIDE 5-3 Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). The table below lists the sizes. Item Detail Standard Sizes Select from Same as Original Size or Standard Size. Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter, Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K Others Select from envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals*. ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4 and Youkei 2 * Size For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8. Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following table. Original Size and the size you wish to send as are the same different Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Sending Size Select [Same as OrigSize] Select the required size Zoom Select [100%] (or [Auto]) Select [Auto] NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom). Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 5-4 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Sending Size: a b 1 *Same as OrigSize ********************* 2 Letter 3 Legal 4 Press the U or V key to select [Sending Size]. 5 Press the OK key. Sending Size appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired sending size. If you select [Others], select one of the other options. a b Others: 1 *ISO B5 ********************* 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 7 5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5-5 Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size. The table below lists the available options. Item Detail 100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size) Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size. NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size. When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and zooming cannot be used. Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper. Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Select the transmission size. 4 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom]. 6 Press the OK key. Zoom appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 5-6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of original depending on the original. The table below lists the binding directions for each original type. Original Type Binding Binding 1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided — — 2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided* Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Top Edge Top, Top Edge Left * Only when the optional document processor is installed for FS-1028MFP. 5 Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Duplex: a b 1 *1-sided ********************* 2 2-sided 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. 5 Press the OK key. Duplex appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [1-sided] or [2sided]. [ Detail ] If you select [2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right Select key), select the binding edge and press the OK key, and then select the original setting orientation on the next screen. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5-7 Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen. • 1-sided / 2-sided Selection When placing the original on the platen [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] When placing the original on the optional document processor [Top Edge Left] [Top Edge Top] Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 5-8 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation]. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* 5 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5-9 5 Sending Functions File Format Select the file format of the image to send. The table below lists the file formats and their details. File Format Adjustable range of image quality Color mode PDF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Full Color, Grayscale JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Full Color, Grayscale NOTE: You cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode. Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] File Format: a b 1 *PDF ********************* 2 TIFF 3 XPS [ Detail ] 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [File Format]. 5 Press the OK key. File Format appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG]. If Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for the color mode for scanning, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) and select the image quality. 5-10 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5 OPERATION GUIDE 5-11 Sending Functions Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Item Detail Text+Photo Text and photos together. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Text Only text, no photos. Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image]. 5 Press the OK key. Original Image appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired image quality. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 5-12 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals. The table below shows the available settings. Item Detail Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original. 5 The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Density: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Manual 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Density]. 5 Press the OK key. Density appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select [Manual], press the OK key, and then select the density on the next screen. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5-13 Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi. The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Scan Resolution: a b 3 200x400dpi S.Fin 4 *300x300dpi ********************* 5 400x400dpi U.Fin 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution]. 5 Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired scan resolution. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 5-14 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White. Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Color Selection: a b 1 *Full Color ********************* 2 Grayscale 3 Black & White 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 5 4 Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection]. 5 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired color mode. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5-15 Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 1 Press the Send key. 2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan]. 4 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 6 Specify the destination. 7 Place the original, and press the Start key. 8 Place the next original, and press the Start key. Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure. When you have scanned all the originals, press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start sending. 5-16 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the document name. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] File Name Entry: A b File_2009* S ABC [ Text ] 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 5 4 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry]. 5 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix5 for details on entering characters. 6 Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional Info. appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix5 for details on entering characters. 7 Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and then press the OK key. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix5 for details on entering characters. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. 5-17 Sending Functions Subject and Body Entry When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] B b Subject Entry: * [ ABC Text 1 Press the Send key. 2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body]. 4 Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. 5 Enter the subject and press the OK key. ] NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject. Body Entry: * [ B b 6 NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the ABC Text body. ] Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 7 5-18 Enter the body and press the OK key. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer. To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-132) must be set to [On] in the network settings. Procedure using computer 1 Install the WIA driver on your computer in the custom mode from the supplied CD-ROM (Product Library). NOTE: For details of installation for WIA driver, refer to Setup Guide. 2 Select Start button of the Windows display, and then Network. 3 Select the machine displayed Multifunctional Devices, and then right-click Install. Installing of the driver starts. 4 After installing the driver, click Close. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Procedure using this machine Displays the screen for sending. NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending. Send to: a b 2 G Folder(SMB) 3 H Folder(FTP) 4 F WSD Scan ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 3 Press the U or V key to select [WSD Scan]. 5-19 5 Sending Functions WSD Scan: a b 1 From Computer 2 From Oper. Panel ********************* [ Exit P :Computer01 Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [From Oper. Panel]. 6 Select the destination computer from the computer list. ] Select Computer: a b P Computer01 ********************* P Computer02 P Computer03 [ Cancel ] [ Detail ] Press Start Key. 4 Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the information of the selected computer. 7 Press the OK key to confirm the destination, and then press the Start key. Transmission starts. NOTE: To change the destination computer, press the Back key and then press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This brings you back to step 6. NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer, press [From Computer] in step 5 and then scan the original from the computer. 5-20 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On Destination: a b 1 *Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry a b Address Book: p Fiala ********************* p Maury p Morgan [ Menu ] Address Entry: A b ******@abcdefg.jp* [ OPERATION GUIDE ABC Text 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 5 4 Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice]. 5 Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or [Address Entry], and then press the OK key. 8 If you select [Address Book], select [Address Book] on the next screen and press the OK key, and then select the notice destination. Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination. If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of the notice destination. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix] 5 for details on entering characters. 5-21 Sending Functions 9 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address. 5-22 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen. Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files. Function Menu: a b 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] FTP Encrypted TX: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [FTP Encrypted TX]. 5 Press the OK key. FTP Encrypted TX appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. OPERATION GUIDE 5-23 5 Sending Functions Sanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable and installthe Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setup Guide. The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver. Operate the WIA Drivers in the same manner. 1 Connect your computer to the machine using a USB cable. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. 3 Use the TWAIN-compatible application to scan from your computer. NOTE: When the login user name and password entry screen appears, enter them and click the OK button. 4 5-24 Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan. The scanned data will be sent to your computer. OPERATION GUIDE 6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box. • • • Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory .................6-2 Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .....6-4 Removing USB Memory ...............................................6-6 OPERATION GUIDE 6-1 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer. Limitations • The following file types can be printed: • PDF file (Version 1.5) • TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format) • XPS file • PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf). • Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels. • Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used. Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory. Document Box: a b 1 USB Memory ********************* USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ] 6-2 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot. 2 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. 4 Press the OK key. USB Memory appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select the the file you want to print. OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed. USB Memory: a b N Store File i Folder-1 j File-1 g ********************* [ Menu ] [ Select ] 6 Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it. When you want to print additional files, repeat steps 5 to 6 to select them. USB Memory: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Delete Ready to print. Copies: A4 q sA A4a 1 [ ] ] [ 7 Press the OK key. A menu appears. 6 8 Press the U or V key to select [Print]. 9 Press the OK key. The basic screen appears. Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print settings, refer to Copying on page 3-9 and Copying Functions on page 4-1. 10 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file begins. OPERATION GUIDE 6-3 Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format. NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100. Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below. Document Box: a b 1 USB Memory ********************* a b USB Memory: N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ] Ready to scan. 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot . 2 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. 4 Press the OK key. USB Memory appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Store File]. 6 Press the OK key. The basic screen appears. Change the original type, file format, etc., as necessary. For changing scan settings, refer to Sending Functions on page 5-1. 7 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory. A4q [ 6-4 ] [ ] OPERATION GUIDE Document Box IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory, ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-6. 6 OPERATION GUIDE 6-5 Document Box Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory. Document Box: a b 1 USB Memory ********************* a b USB Memory: N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ] Menu(Folder): 1 Memory Detail 2 Remove Memory a b 6-6 OK Press the Document Box key. The Document Box menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. 3 Press the OK key. USB Memory appears. 4 Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). A menu appears. NOTE: This is the image on the screen when a folder is selected. [Open] is not displayed when a file is selected. USB memory can be safely removed. [ 1 5 Press the U or V key to select [Remove Memory]. 6 Press the OK key. A confirmation message appears. 7 Press [OK] (the Right Select key) or remove the USB memory. The screen returns to the Document Box menu. ] OPERATION GUIDE 7 Status / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication. • • • • • • Checking Job Status .....................................................7-2 Checking Job History ....................................................7-8 Sending the Job Log History.......................................7-13 Pause and Resumption of Jobs ..................................7-19 Canceling of Jobs .......................................................7-19 Device/Communication ...............................................7-20 OPERATION GUIDE 7-1 Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job. The following job statuses are available. Screen Job statuses to be displayed Print Job • • • • • • • Copy Printer FAX reception Document Box E-mail reception Job Report /List Printing data from removable memory Send Job • • • • • • FAX transmission PC (SMB/FTP) transmission E-mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Store Job • • Scan FAX Scheduled Job • FAX Print Job Status Screen Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Print Job Status: a b 0008 r Copy r 0009 r maury’s data 0010 W aaaa [ Pause ] [ Menu ] 1 7-2 2 3 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status]. 3 Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. Press the U or V key to check the print queue. 4 OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel 0009 Detail: Status: Processing C b 1/8 Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job. NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy (number of pages and copies to be printed) Original Page (number of pages of the original) When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen. No. Item / Key Detail 1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type Copy job r Printer job W FAX reception b E-mail reception p Job from Document Box x Report / List j Data from Removable Memory Y 3 OPERATION GUIDE Job Name Job Name or file name 7-3 7 Status / Job Cancel No. 4 Item / Key Status Detail Status of job r: s: no icon: R: S: Printing Print Waiting Pausing print job or error Preferential print job is running Suspended because preferential print job is running Send Job Status screen Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Send Job Status: a b 0010 b 066764333 r N 0011 p Broadcast 0017 b 0324256345 N [ Cancel ] [ Menu ] 1 2 3 0011 Detail: Status: Processing 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Status]. 3 Press the OK key. Send Job Status appears. Press the U or V key to check the send queue. 4 C b 1/8 Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job. NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Destination 7-4 OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the destination list. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list. Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen. No. Item / Key Detail 1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type 7 Sending Job FAX b Sending Job PC (SMB) G Sending Job PC (FTP) H Sending Job E-mail p Sending Job TWAIN2 U Sending Job WSD Scan F When broadcast sending is done, Broadcast is diaplayed next to the icon. 3 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or server name) 4 Status Status of job r: no icon: s: X: OPERATION GUIDE Sending Sending Waiting Pausing the job Stop sending 7-5 Status / Job Cancel Store Job Status screen Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Store Job Status: a b r 0008 N Scan 0009 b maury’s data 0010 b aaaa [ Cancel ] [ Menu ] 1 2 3 0009 Detail: Status: Processing 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Status]. 3 Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press the U or V key to check the store queue. 4 C b 1/8 Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job. NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Sender Info. (destination information) 7-6 OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen. No. Display / Key Details 1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan N 7 Storing Job FAX b 3 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed. 4 Status Status of job s: no icon: OPERATION GUIDE Storing Data Storing Waiting 7-7 Status / Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs. NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer. Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job. The following job histories are available. Screen Job histories to be displayed Print Job • • • • • • Copy Printer FAX reception E-mail reception Job Report / List Printing data from removable memory Send Job • • • • • FAX PC (SMB/FTP) E-mail Application Multiple destination Store Job • • Scan FAX Scheduled Job • FAX Displaying Print Job Log Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] a Print Job Log: 0006 r maury’s da. 0007 r tom’s da. 0008 r susan’s da. [ Detail 7-8 b v 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Log]. 3 Press the OK key. Print Job Log appears. Press the U or V key to check the print log. u u ] OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 7-2. 0006 Detail: Result: Error 00100 C b 1/9 Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed information of the selected print log. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy (number of pages and copies to be printed) Original Page (number of pages of the original) Sender Info. (destination information) When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. OPERATION GUIDE 7-9 7 Status / Job Cancel Displaying Send Job Log Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Send 0004 0003 0002 Job Log: a p Broadcast b 0756545865 p Morgan@kyocN [ Detail b u u v ] 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Log]. 3 Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press the U or V key to check the send log. A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Send Job Status screen on page 7-4. 0004 Detail: Result: OK C b 1/9 Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed information of the selected send log. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Destination 7-10 OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the destination list. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list. Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen. Displaying Store Job Log Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] a Store Job Log: 0008 b Scan 0009 b maury’s data 0010 Y aaaa [ Detail b u v v ] 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Log]. 3 Press the OK key. Store Job Log appears. Press the U or V key to check the store queue. A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Store Job Status screen on page 7-6. OPERATION GUIDE 7-11 7 Status / Job Cancel 0009 Detail: Result: Error 10200 C b 1/9 Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) to check the detailed information of the selected job. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Sender Info. (destination information) When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. 7-12 OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached. Displaying Job Log History Menu Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************** Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] a b Report: 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Result Rpt Set. 3 Job Log History [ Exit ] Copy, print, send, storing functions are restricted now. 23:00 - 08:30 OPERATION GUIDE Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Report]. 3 Press the OK key. The Report menu appears. IMPORTANT: When a time period to prohibit acceptance of jobs is set in timer settings, the screen will display Copy, print, send, storing functions are restricted now. and return to the standby screen. 7-13 7 Status / Job Cancel Report: a b 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. 4 Job Log History ********************* [ Exit ] Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Job Log History]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu appears. 1 In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key to select [Destination]. 2 Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears. 1 In the Destination menu, press the U or V key to select [Confirmation]. Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent. Use the procedure below to set the destination. Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending 2 Send History 3 Destination ********************* [ Exit ] Destination: a b 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [ Exit ] Confirming Current Destination a b Destination: 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [ 7-14 Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@kyoceramita *********************N [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears. NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination.Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. 3 Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic screen reappears. 1 In the Destination menu, press the U or V key to select [Register]. 2 Press the OK key. Register appears. Registering Destination a b Destination: 1 Confirmation 2 Register ********************* [ Exit ] Register: a b 1 Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry 7 To select a destination from the address book, press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and then press the OK key. This displays the address book. Select your desired destination. NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28. To directly enter a destination, press the U or V key to select [Address Entry] and then press the OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the destination address directly. Completed. OPERATION GUIDE 3 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Destination menu. 7-15 Status / Job Cancel Register: a b 1 Address Book ********************* 2 *Address Entry NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has been changed after you selected the destination from the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address. Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged. Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission. Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ] Auto Sending: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7-16 1 In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key to select [Auto Sending]. 2 Press the OK key. Auto Sending appears. OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel 3 If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the number of jobs to be sent at a time. D b Jobs: Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. (1 - 16) ******16*jobs 4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu. Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually. Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually. Job Log History: a b 1 Auto Sending 2 Send History ********************* 3 Destination [ Exit ] Send the job log history. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No Enter destination. 1 In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key to select [Send History]. 2 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. ] IMPORTANT: If no destination is registered, Enter destination is displayed. Refer to Registering Destination on page 7-15 and register the desired destination. 3 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted. is displayed and the job log is sent to the registered destination before the screen returns to the Job Log History menu. Setting E-mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail. Use the procedure below to set the subject. OPERATION GUIDE 7-17 7 Status / Job Cancel Job Log History: a b 2 Send History 3 Destination 4 Subject ********************* [ Exit ] B b Subject: %printer* In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key to select [Subject]. 2 Press the OK key. Subject appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix[ 7-18 1 ABC Text 5 for details on entering characters. ] 3 Enter the destination address. 4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu. OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting. The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below. Status: a b 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] Print Job Status: a b 0008 r Copy r ********************* 0009 r maury’s data 0010 y aaaa [ Pause ] [ Menu ] Pausing: a b 0008 r Copy s ********************* 0009 r maury’s data s s 0010 y aaaa [ Resume ] [ Menu ] 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status]. 3 Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. 7 4 Press [Pause] (the Left Select key). Printing is paused. When you press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to resume printing. NOTE: When you press the Back key, a confirmation Resume paused jobs. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to resume printing. ] Canceling of Jobs For canceling jobs, refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3-31. OPERATION GUIDE 7-19 Status / Job Cancel Device/Communication Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their status. Check of Device Status Status: a b 7 Store Job Log 8 Scanner ********************* 9 Printer [ Pause ] b Scanner: 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [Scanner], [Printer] or [FAX]. 3 Press the OK key. This displays the status of the device selected in step 2. 4 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status menu. Ready. b Printer: Ready. b FAX: Ready. [ Log ] The items you can check are described below. Scanner The information (scanning, pausing, etc.) is displayed. Printer Information (waiting, printing, etc.) is displayed. 7-20 OPERATION GUIDE Status / Job Cancel FAX The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed. Log: a b 1 Outgoing FAX Log ********************* 2 Incoming FAX Log 3 Outgoing FAX Rpt If you press [Log] (the Right Select key), the Log menu appears. From this screen, you can check or print the transmission/reception history. NOTE: If you are using a user management function, the menu for printing the transmission/reception history appears only when you have logged in as an administrator. Handling the Devices Status: a b < Paper Status = Memory Card > USB Memory ********************* [ Pause ] C b 1/3 USB Memory: Capacity: 512.0MB 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status menu appears. 7 2 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. 3 Press the OK key. This displays the status of the USB memory. [ Remove ] Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. The items displayed are as follows: Capacity Used Area Free Space When you press [Remove] (the Left Select key), a confirmation screen appears and you can remove the USB memory. USB memory can be safely removed. [ OK ] 4 OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status menu. 7-21 Status / Job Cancel 7-22 OPERATION GUIDE 8 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Common Settings .........................................................8-2 Copy Settings..............................................................8-56 Sending Settings.........................................................8-62 Document Box Settings ..............................................8-66 Printer Settings ...........................................................8-69 Printing Reports/Sending Notice.................................8-81 Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................8-87 Date/Timer ..................................................................8-92 Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys). 8-112 Restarting the System...............................................8-127 Network Setup ..........................................................8-128 Network Security.......................................................8-138 Interface Block Setting ..............................................8-146 Security Level (Security Level setting)......................8-150 Optional Functions ....................................................8-151 OPERATION GUIDE 8-1 Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings Common settings include; • How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2 • Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2 • Default Screen …8-5 • Sound …8-6 • Display Bright. …8-7 • Original/Paper Settings …8-8 • Switching Unit of Measurement …8-27 • Error Handling …8-28 • Function Defaults …8-30 • Login Operation …8-55 How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. NOTE: • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 2 The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears. Switching the Language for Display [Language] You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below. You can optionally download messages in other languages. Contact your service technician for information. 8-2 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Language: a b 1 *English ********************* 2 Deutsch 3 Français 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Language]. 4 Press the OK key. The Language menu appears. The available languages are as follows: English Deutsch Français Español Italiano Nederlands Русский Português 8 The optional languages are as follows: Optional language Message display Turkish Türkçe Greek Ελληνικά Polish Polski Czech Hungarian Magyar Finnish Suomi Hebrew Arabic Swedish Svensk Danish Dansk Norwegian Norsk Romanian OPERATION GUIDE 8-3 Default Setting (System Menu) Optional language Message display Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese If you are using one of the optional languages, it is displayed in place of Portugues. 8-4 5 Press the U or V key to select a language. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Item Description Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed) appears. Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed) appears. Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed) appears. FAX The FAX screen (the screen shown when the FAX key is pressed) appears. Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed) appears. 8 Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language 2 Default Screen ********************* 3 Sound [ Exit ] a b Default Screen: 1 Status 2 *Copy ********************* 3 Send OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Default Screen]. 4 Press the OK key. Default Screen appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select the default screen. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. 8-5 Default Setting (System Menu) Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting. Item Value Key Confirmation Off, On * Emit a sound when the control panel are pressed. Job Finish Off*, On Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed. Ready Off*, On Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed. Warning Off, On* Emit a sound when errors occur. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language 2 Default Screen 3 Sound ********************* [ Exit ] Sound: a b 1 Buzzer ********************* 2 FAX Speaker 3 FAX Monitor [ Exit ] a b Buzzer: 1 Key Confirmation ********************* 2 Job finish 3 Ready [ Exit ] 8-6 Description 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Sound]. 4 Press the OK key. Sound appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Buzzer]. 6 Press the OK key. Buzzer appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Key Confirmation]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Key Confirmation: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8 Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu. Display Bright. Set the brightness of the display. Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Display Bright.: a b 3 Darker -1 4 *Normal 0 ********************* 5 Lighter+1 OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Display Bright.]. 4 Press the OK key. Display Bright. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select the display brightness from [Darker -3] to [Lighter +3]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. 8-7 Default Setting (System Menu) Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Dimensions Inch models X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Use the procedure below to set a custom original size. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] Size Entry(Y): (1.97 - 8.50) x ***7.00*" 8-8 D b 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Custom Orig.Size]. 6 Press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears. 7 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y). OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Size Entry(X): (1.97 - 14.02) J **11.23*" D b 8 Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears. 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X). 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. 8 OPERATION GUIDE 8-9 Default Setting (System Menu) Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size to be used as the default value. Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] Def. Orig. Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq 8-10 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Def. Orig. Size]. 6 Press the OK key. Def. Orig. Size appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper size to be used as the default value. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Inch models Metric models Dimensions Cassette: X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Paper Feeder PF-100: X: 5.83 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 8.27 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) MP Tray: X: 2.75 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Cassette: X: 105 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) Paper Feeder PF-100: X: 148 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 210 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) MP Tray: X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) 8 Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source. Select media type for each paper size. Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock,Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1-8 NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for Custom 1-8 for media type. Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 8-11 Default Setting (System Menu) Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] Custom PaperSize a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 2 Size 3 Cassette 3 Size D b Size Entry(Y): (5.83 - 14.02) x ***11.49*" Size Entry(X): Db (4.13 - 8.50) J ***6.00*" 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Custom PaperSize]. 6 Press the OK key. The Custom PaperSize menu appears. 7 Select the paper source in which you want to set the custom size and press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears. 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y). 9 Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears. 10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X). Media Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough 11 Press the OK key. Mediatype appears. 12 Press the U or V key to select the media type for which you want to set the custom size. 13 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. 8-12 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3). The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Description Paper Size Letter, Legal, Statement*, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6*, B5, Folio, 16K, Custom Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Recycled, Preprint***, Bond**, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***, Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**, High Quality, Custom 1-8** * ** *** Cassette 1 only To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24. Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Set.], [Cassette 2 Set.] or [Cassette 3 Set.]. 8-13 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette ([Cassette 2 or 3]) Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [ Exit Cassette 1 Set.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type Exit The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size]. 8 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select the paper size. ] Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa [ 6 10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu. ] 11 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type]. Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled 12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears. 13 Press the U or V key to select the paper type. 14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu. 8-14 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Paper Size Standard Sizes Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K Others Select special standard sizes or custom size*. ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom Size Entry Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes. Inch models: X: 2.75 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models: X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) Media Type * ** Description 8 Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8** Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size. Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24. NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8-15 Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] a b MP Tray Set.: 1 MP Tray Size ********************* 2 MP Tray Type [ Exit Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.]. 6 Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size]. 8 Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select the paper size. ] a b MP Tray Size: < 16Ka = Others > *Size Entry ********************* Others: a b 1 *ISO B5a ********************* 2 Envelopr #10 3 Envelope #9 8-16 2 If you select [Others], you can select from additional paper sizes. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [Size Entry], you can register a custom size. In the screen that appears, set the vertical size (Y) and horizontal size (X) of the paper using the numeric keys. Size Entry(Y): D b (5.83 - 14.02) x ***11.49*" MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size 2 MP Tray Type ********************* [ Exit 10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu. ] 11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type]. Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled 12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears. 8 13 Press the U or V key to select the paper type. 14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu. Paper Weight Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows. Paper types and weights z: Available ×: Not available Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra Heavy z** × × × × × × z z z z z z z z z z × z z z z × × × × Labels z z z z z z z z Recycled z z z z × × × × Preprinted z z z z × × × × Bond z z z z z z z × Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Plain z z z Transparency × × Rough z Vellum OPERATION GUIDE Normal 3 8-17 Default Setting (System Menu) Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra Heavy Cardstock × × × × z z z z Color z z z z × × × × Prepunched z z z z × × × × Letterhead z z z z × × × × Thick × × × × z z z z Envelope × × × × z z z z High Quality z z z z × × × × Custom 1-8 z z z z z z z z Paper Weight For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed. Item Duplex Name Description Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed. Permit Duplex printing allowed. Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed. Use the procedure below to set the paper weight. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-18 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] Media type Set.: K b 1 Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough [ Exit ] a b Plain: 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Print Density [ Exit 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Media Type Set.]. 6 Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper type for which you want to make settings. 8 Press the OK key. The menu for the selected paper type appears. ] 9 a b Paper Weight: 1 Extra Heavy ********************* 2 *Heavy 3 3 Heavy 2 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Weight]. 10 Press the OK key. The Paper Weight menu appears. 11 Press the U or V key to select the weight of paper. a b Plain: 1 Paper Weight 2 Print Density ********************* [ Exit 12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected paper type. ] 13 Press the U or V key to select [Print Density]. OPERATION GUIDE 8-19 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Print Density: a b 2 Medium Dark 3 *Normal ********************* 4 Medium Light 14 Press the OK key. The Print Density menu appears. 15 Press the U or V key to select the print density. a b Plain: 1 Paper Weight 2 Print Density ********************* [ Exit 16 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected paper type. ] Custom X: a b 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Print Density 3 Duplex [ Exit ] When the selected paper type is [Custom 1 to 8], you can further set whether to enable or disable duplex and the name of the custom paper type. 17 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. a b Duplex: 1 Permit ********************* 2 Prohibit [ Exit 18 Press the OK key. The Duplex menu appears. ] 19 Press the U or V key to select whether to enable or disable duplex. a b Custom X: 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Print Density 3 Duplex [ Exit ] 20 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type. 21 Press the U or V key to select [Name]. 8-20 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Name Entry: C b Osaka SD Kyocer*S [ ABC Text 22 Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed. Enter the name of the custom paper type. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix] Custom X: a b 1 Paper Weight ********************* 2 Print Density 3 Duplex [ Exit ] 5 for details on entering characters. 23 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type. 8 OPERATION GUIDE 8-21 Default Setting (System Menu) Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional side feeder installed. Use the procedure below to select the default paper source. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] Def. PaperSurce: a b 1 *Cassette 1 ********************* 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 8-22 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Def. PaperSource]. 6 Press the OK key. Def. PaperSource appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper source to be used preferentially. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Media for Auto Selection When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size. Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] a b Media for Auto: 1 All Media Type 2 *Plain ********************* 3 Transparency OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Media for Auto]. 6 Press the OK key. Media for Auto appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [All Media Type] or the paper type to be used for paper selection. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. 8-23 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority]. The table below lists the available settings and their details. Item Description Adj. PrintDirect Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead. Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation. Select this item when paper orientation is not important. If you select [Adj. PrintDirect], load paper according to the steps below. Example: copying on Letterhead Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is supposed to be done, upward. 8-24 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Orig./Paper Set.: a b 1 Custom Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] SpecialPaper Act.:a b 1 *Adj. PrintDirect ********************* 2 Speed Priority SpecialPaper Act.:a b 1 Adj. PrintDirect 2 *Speed Priority ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu appears. 8 5 Press the U or V key to select [SpcialPaper Act.]. 6 Press the OK key. SpcialPaper Act. appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Adj. PrintDirect] or [Speed Priority]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu. 8-25 Default Setting (System Menu) Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] D b Preset Limit: (1 - 999) **999* 8-26 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Preset Limit]. 4 Press the OK key. The Preset Limit menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to enter the number of copies. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Use the procedure below to change the input units. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] a b Measurement: 1 *inch ********************* 2 mm OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Measurement]. 4 Press the OK key. The Measurement menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [inch] or [mm]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. 8-27 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type. Item Description 1-sided Printed in 1-sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. Paper Mismatch Error Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper type set in the paper source when printing from your computer. Item Description Ignore Printing continues. Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-28 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Error Handling]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Error Handling: a b 1 DuplexPaperError ********************* 2 PaperMismatchErr [ Exit a b Error Handling: 1 DuplexPaperError 2 PaperMismatchErr ********************* Exit Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [DuplexPagerError]. 6 Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu. ] DuplexPaperError: a b 1 *1-sided ********************* 2 Display Error [ 4 ] 9 PaperMismatchErr: a b 1 *Ignore ********************* 2 Display Error Press the U or V key to select [PagerMismatchErr]. 10 Press the OK key. PagerMismatchErr appears. 11 Press the U or V key to select the method to handle paper mismatch. 12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-29 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Orig.Orientation Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below. Item Description c Top Edge Top Select the original's top edge at the top. d Top Edge Left Select the original's top edge at the left. Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation. Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-30 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* 6 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [c Top Edge Top] or [d Top Edge Left] . 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below. Item Description Off Continuous scan not performed On Continuous scan performed 8 Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation. Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 8-31 Default Setting (System Menu) Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan]. 6 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Original Image Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below. Item Description Text+Photo Text and photos together. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Text Only text, no photos. for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software. Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-32 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image]. 6 Press the OK key. Original Image appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text] or [for OCR]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi U.Fin (Ultra Fine), 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi S.Fin (Super Fine), 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Norm. (Normal). Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 8-33 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] Scan Resolution: a b 1 *200x100dpi Norm. ********************* 2 200x200dpi Fine 3 200x400dpi S.Fin 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution]. 6 Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [200x100dpi Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin], [300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin] or [600x600dpi]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Color Selection Select the default color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below. Color mode Description Full Color Scan document in full color. Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish. Black & White Scan document in black and white. Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-34 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] Color Selection: a b 1 *Full Color ********************* 2 Grayscale 3 Black & White OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection]. 6 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears. 8 7 Press the U or V key to select [Full Color], [Grayscale] or [Black & White]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 8-35 Default Setting (System Menu) File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below. File Format Description PDF Send files in PDF format. TIFF Send files in TIFF format. XPS Send files in XPS format. JPEG Send files in JPEG format. NOTE: Refer to page 5-10 for file formats. Use the procedure below to select the default file format. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-36 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [File Format]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) File Format: a b 1 *PDF ********************* 2 TIFF 3 XPS 6 Press the OK key. File Format appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Density Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below. Item Description Manual (Normal 0) Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density. Auto Set to Auto density. 8 Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Density]. 8-37 Default Setting (System Menu) Density: a b 1 Auto 2 *Manual ********************* 6 Press the OK key. Density appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available default settings are shown below. Item Description 100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%). Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size/ sending size. Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-38 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto 6 Press the OK key. Zoom appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set. The table below lists the additional information available. Item Description None No additional information available. Date Adds date and time. Job No. Adds the job number. Job No. + Date Adds the job number plus date and time. Date + Job No. Adds date and time plus the job number. 8 NOTE: • Refer to page 4-18 and page 5-17 for name entry. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Use the procedure below to set the default file name. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 8-39 Default Setting (System Menu) Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] File name Entry: A b doc 1* S ABC [ Text ] Additional Info.: a b 1 *None ********************* 2 Date 3 Job No. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry]. 6 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. Enter the document name (up to 32 characters). 7 Press the OK key. Additional Info appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [None], [Date], [JobNo.], [JobNo. + Date] or [Date + JobNo.]. 9 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail. NOTE: • Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-21. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-40 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] K b Subject Entry: abcdefghijklmnopqrstu vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ* S ABC [ Text ] Body Entry: a b abcdefghijklmnopqrstu vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ* ABC [ Text ] 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body]. 6 Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. Enter the e-mail subject (up to 60 characters). If you press the Back key, you can return to the Function Default menu. 7 If you press the Back key, you can return to Subject Entry. 8 OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key. Body Entry appears. Enter email body text (up to 500 characters). Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 8-41 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Collate Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings. Item Collate Description Off Collate not performed. On Collate performed. NOTE: Refer to page 3-17 for Collate/Offset. Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] a b Collate: 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 8-42 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Collate]. 6 Press the OK key. Collate appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Off No EcoPrint performed. On EcoPrint performed. NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint. Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint]. 8-43 Default Setting (System Menu) EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description g L to R f T to B Arranges from left to right or top to bottom. e R to L Arranges from right to left. Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-44 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 2 in 1 Layout a b 1 *g L to R f T to B ********************* 2 e R to L 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [2 in 1 Layout]. 8 Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [g L to R f T to B] or [e R to L]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 8 4 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [4 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description h Right then Down Arranges from upper left to right. i Down then Right Arranges from upper left to bottom. j Left then Down Arranges from upper right to left. k Down then Left Arranges from upper right to bottom. Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8-45 Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] a b Detail Setting: 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 4 in 1 Layout: a b 1 *h Right then Down ********************* 2 i Down then Right 3 j Left then Down 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [4 in 1 Layout]. 8 Press the OK key. 4 in 1 Layout appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [h Right then Down], [i Down then Right], [j Left then Down] or [k Down then Left]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 8-46 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Border Line Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description None No border line. l Solid Line Draws solid border lines. m Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines. n Positioning Mark Puts a mark on the border line position. Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] a b Detail Setting: 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Border Line]. 8-47 Default Setting (System Menu) Border Line: a b 1 * None ********************* 2 l Solid Line 3 m Dotted Line 8 Press the OK key. Border Line appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [ None], [l Solid Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Orig. Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows: NOTE: This setting is shown only when the optional document processor (DP-110) is installed. Item Description o Left/Right Left/right binding p Top Top binding Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-48 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] a b Orig. Binding: 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Binding]. 8 Press the OK key. Orig. Binding appears. 8 9 Press the U or V key to select [o Left/Right] or [ p Top]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-49 Default Setting (System Menu) Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description o Left/Right Left/right binding p Top Top binding Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] a b Detail Setting: 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 8-50 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Finish Binding]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Finish.. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top 8 Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [ o Left/Right] or [p Top]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Image Quality Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. Select the default value in the range from [1 Low(High Comp)] (high compression) to [5 High(Low Comp)] (low compression). Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 8-51 Default Setting (System Menu) Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] Image Quality: a b 1 *1 Low(High Comp) ********************* 2 2 3 3 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Image Quality]. 8 Press the OK key. Image Quality appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select from [1 Low(High Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Color TIFF Comp. Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine. Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-52 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] Detail Setting: a b 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] Color TIFF Comp.: a b 1 *TIFF V6 ********************* 2 TTN2 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Color TIFF Comp.]. 8 Press the OK key. Color TIFF Comp. appears. 8 9 Press the U or V key to select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. XPS FitTo Page Set the default value for XPS print range setting for printing an XPS document after enlarging or reducing it to the size that fits in the print area. Use the procedure below to set the default value for XPS print range setting. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 8-53 Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Function Default: a b 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] a b Detail Setting: 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] a b XPS FitTo Page: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [XPS FitTo Page]. 8 Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 8-54 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Login Operation Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled. Item Description Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters. Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears. Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Login Operation:a b 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Login Operation]. 4 Press the OK key. Login Operation appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Use Numeric Key] or [Select Character]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. 1 *Use Numeric Key ********************* 2 Select Character OPERATION GUIDE 8-55 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions. • Photo Processing …8-56 • Paper Selection …8-57 • Auto Paper Selection …8-58 • Auto % Priority …8-58 • Select Key Set …8-60 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Photo Processing Set the resolution for copying a photo. Item Description Dithering(Normal) Sets the resolution to standard. Dithering(Rough) Sets the resolution to low. Use the procedure below to set Photo Processing. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. [ Exit ] Photo Processing:a b 1 *Dithering(Normal) ********************* 2 Dithering(Rough) 8-56 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Copy]. 2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Photo Processing]. 4 Press the OK key. Photo Processing appears. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Dithering(Normal)] or [Dithering(Rough)]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals. Def. PaperSource Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-22). Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] a b Copy: 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. [ Exit ] Paper Selection: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Def. PaperSource OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Copy]. 2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection]. 4 Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Def. Paper Source]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. 8-57 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original. Same as OrigSize Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom. Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] a b Copy: 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. [ Exit ] AutoPaperSelect.:a b 1 *MostSuitableSize ********************* 2 Same as OrigSize 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Copy]. 2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [AutoPaperSelect.]. 4 Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [MostSuitableSize] or [Same as OrigSize]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/ zoom) is performed. 8-58 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off. Item Detail Off No zoom performed (copied in original size). On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate. Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] a b Copy: 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. [ Exit ] Auto % Priority: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Copy]. 2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears. 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Auto % Priority.]. 4 Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. 8-59 Default Setting (System Menu) Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using copy functions. You can register one of the following functions to each key. • None • Paper Selection • Collate • Duplex • Zoom • Combine • Original Size • Orig.Orientation • Original Image • Density • EcoPrint • Continuous Scan • File Name Entry • JobFinish Notice • Print Override Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. [ Exit ] 8-60 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Copy]. 2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Select Key Set.: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [ Exit OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right]. 6 Press the OK key. This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is selected. 7 Press the U or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. ] Left: a b 4 Duplex 5 *Zoom ********************* 6 Combine This function is already registered. 4 IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed. 8-61 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options. • Select Key Set …8-62 • DestinationCheck …8-64 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using sending functions. You can register one of the following functions to each key. • None • Color Selection • Original Size • Original Image • Scan Resolution • Sending Size • Zoom • Orig.Orientation • Continuous Scan • File Format • File Name Entry • Subject/Body • JobFinish Notice • FAX Resolution • FAX Direct TX • FAX Delayed TX • FAX RX Polling • Density • Duplex • FTP Encrypted TX 8-62 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ] Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck [ Exit Exit OPERATION GUIDE 2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears. 8 ] a b Left: 2 Color Selection 3 Original Size ********************* 4 Original Image This function is already registered. In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Send]. ] Select Key Set.: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [ 1 5 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right]. 6 Press the OK key. This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is selected. 7 Press the U or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu. IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed. 8-63 Default Setting (System Menu) DestinationCheck Set whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. The setting items are as follows: Item Description Dest. Confirm. Sets whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. Check New Dest. Sets whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen for a new destination. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ] Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck [ Exit Exit 2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [DestinationCheck]. 4 Press the OK key. The DestinationCheck menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Dest. Confirm] or [Check New Dest.]. 6 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen for the selected function. ] Dest. Confirm.: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8-64 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Send]. ] DestinationCheck:a b 1 Dest. Confirm. ********************* 2 Check New Dest. [ 1 The screen shown is the one when Dest. Confirm is selected. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu. 8 OPERATION GUIDE 8-65 Default Setting (System Menu) Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box. • Select Key Set …8-66 Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when printing from or saving to a document box. You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document box. Print • None • Collate • Paper Selection • Duplex • File Name Entry • JobFinish Notice • Print Override • Encrypted PDF Store • None • Color Selection • Original Size • Original Image • Scan Resolution • Storing Size • Zoom • Orig.Orientation • Continuous Scan • File Format • File Name Entry • JobFinish Notice • Density • Duplex 8-66 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box ********************* < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ] a b Document Box: 1 Sub Address Box ********************* 2 Select Key Set. 3 Polling Box [ Exit ] Select Key Set.: a b 1 Print ********************* 2 Store [ Exit Exit In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Document Box]. 2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears. 8 ] a b Print: 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [ 1 5 Press the U or V key to select [Print] or [Store]. 6 Press the OK key. This displays the flexible key selection screen for the function selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Print] is selected. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right]. 8 Press the OK key. This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 7. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is selected. 9 Press the U or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key. ] a b Left: 1 None ********************* 2 Collate 3 Paper Selection 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Document Box menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-67 Default Setting (System Menu) This function is already registered. 8-68 IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and This function is already registered. is displayed. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Printer Settings Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine. • Emulation Set …8-69 • EcoPrint …8-72 • Override A4/LTR …8-73 • Duplex …8-74 • Copies …8-75 • Orientation …8-76 • FormFeed Timeout …8-77 • LF Action …8-77 • CR Action …8-78 • Paper Feed Mode…8-79 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. 8 Emulation Set Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers. Selection of emulation This machine can emulate the following printers: • Line Printer • IBM Proprinter • DIABLO 630 • EPSON LQ-850 • PCL6 • KPDL • KPDL(Auto) OPERATION GUIDE 8-69 Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the emulation. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] Emulation Set.: a b 5 PCL6 6 KPDL 7 *KPDL(Auto) ********************* 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Emuration Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. Emuration Set. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select the printer you want to emulate. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. NOTE: If you select [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], the operation after selecting the emulation is different from others. If you select [KPDL], refer to page 8-71. If you select [KPDL(Auto)], refer to page 8-71. 8-70 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Emulation Set.: a b 5 PCL6 6 KPDL ********************* 7 KPDL(Auto) KPDL Error Rpt: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 1 In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select [KPDL]. 2 Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. 8 When KPDL(Auto) Is Selected for Emulation If you use the KPDL(Auto) emulation mode, KPDL and another emulation mode can be automatically switched according to the data (alternative emulation). For alternative emulation, you can select one of the following printers. The default setting is PCL6. • Line Printer • IBM Proprinter • DIABLO 630 • EPSON LQ-850 • PCL6 Also, as when you select [KPDL], set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Emulation Set.: a b 5 PCL6 6 KPDL 7 KPDL(Auto) ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 1 In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select [KPDL(Auto)]. 8-71 Default Setting (System Menu) Alt. Emulation: a b 3 DIABLO 630 4 EPSON LQ-850 5 *PCL6 ********************* KPDL Error Rpt: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 2 Press the OK key. Alt. Emulation appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select the printer for alternative emulation. 4 Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] 8-72 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 4 Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source. Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size. 8 Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting. The default setting is On. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Override A4/LTR]. 8-73 Default Setting (System Menu) Override A4/LTR: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 4 Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Off No duplex mode Bind Long Edge Longer edge bound Bind Short Edge Shorter edge bound Finish Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] 8-74 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Duplex: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Bind Long Edge 3 Bind Short Edge 4 Press the OK key. Duplex appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off], [Bind Long Edge] or [Bind Short Edge]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999. Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] D b Copies: (1 - 999) *****999*copies OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 8 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Copies]. 4 Press the OK key. Copies appears. 5 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. 8-75 Default Setting (System Menu) Orientation Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape. Portrait Landscape Printer Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] a b Orientation: 1 *Portrait ********************* 2 Landscape 8-76 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orientation]. 4 Press the OK key. Orientation appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Portrait] or [Landscape]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) FormFeed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds. Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] FormFeed TimeOut:* b (5 - 495) ******30*Sec. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [FormFeed Timeout]. 4 Press the OK key. FormFeed Timeout appears. 5 Press the U or V key to set the Form Feed Timeout. You can set the timeout delay in seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. 8 LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is LF Only. Item Description LF Only Only line feed performed. LF and CR Line feed and character return performed. OPERATION GUIDE 8-77 Default Setting (System Menu) Item Ignore LF Description No line feed performed. Use the procedure below to specify a LF action. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] M b LF Action: 1 *LF Only ********************* 2 LF and CR 3 Ignore LF 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [LF Action]. 4 Press the OK key. LF Action appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is CR Only. Item 8-78 Description CR Only Only character return performed. LF and CR Character return and line feed performed. Ignore CR No character return performed. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify a CR action. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] a b CR Action: 1 *CR Only ********************* 2 LF and CR 3 Ignore CR 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [CR Action]. 4 Press the OK key. 8 5 Press the U or V key to select [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Paper Feed Mode Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions. The default setting is Auto. Item Description Auto Sets the paper feed direction automatically. Fixed Sets the paper feed direction the same as in the previous printing operation. OPERATION GUIDE 8-79 Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] Paper Feed Mode: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Fixed 8-80 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Printer]. 2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Feed Mode]. 4 Press the OK key. Paper Feed Mode appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Fixed]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Printing Reports/Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges. Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows. Menu map Outputs a menu map of this machine. Menu Map Status Page Firmware Version 8 Status Page Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed. Status Page Firmware Version OPERATION GUIDE 8-81 Default Setting (System Menu) Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine. Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. [ Exit ] a b Report Print: 1 Menu Map ********************* 2 Status Page 3 Font List [ Exit ] 8-82 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Report]. 2 Press the OK key. The Report menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Report Print]. 4 Press the OK key. The Report Print menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Menu Map], [Status Page] or [Font List]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Print. Are you sure? z Status Page [ Yes ] [ Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. The screen shown is the one when Status Page is selected. No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu. NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Print, storing functions are restricted now. is displayed and the output is canceled. Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose. Network Status Page 8 Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol. Use the procedure below to print a Service Status / Network Status. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Adjust/Maint.]. 8-83 Default Setting (System Menu) Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Correct. Bk Line [ Exit ] Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 New Developer [ Exit ] Print. Are you sure? z Network Status [ Yes ] [ No 2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. Service Setting appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Service Status] or [Network Status]. 6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. The screen shown is the one when Network Status is selected. ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Print, storing functions are restricted now. is displayed and the output is canceled. 8-84 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Error Only. Item Description Off No result report printed. On Result report automatically printed. Transmitted images can also be attached. Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached. Use the procedure below to send a Result Report. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] a b Report: 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. 3 Result Rpt Set. [ Exit ] Result Rpt Set.: a b 1 Send Result ********************* 2 FAX RX Result 3 JobFinish Notice [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Report]. 2 Press the OK key. The Report menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Result Rpt Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The Result Rpt Set. menu appears. 8-85 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Send Result: a b 1 E-mail/Folder ********************* 2 FAX [ Exit Press the U or V key to select [Send Result]. The Send Result menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [E-mail/Folder]. Email/Folder appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On] or [Error Only]. 8 Press the OK key. A Result Report is sent. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send Result menu. ] a b E-mail/Folder: 1 Off 2 On 3 *Error Only ********************* 8-86 5 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. • Copy Denst. Adj. …8-87 • Send/Box Density …8-88 • Correct. Bk Line …8-89 • New Developer...8-90 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Copy Denst. Adj. Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes. Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ] Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Correct. Bk Line [ Exit ] Copy Denst. Adj.: a b 1 Auto ********************* 2 Manual [ OPERATION GUIDE Exit 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Adjust/Maint.]. 8 2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Copy Denst. Adj.]. 4 Press the OK key. Copy Denst. Adj. appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. ] 8-87 Default Setting (System Menu) Manual: a b 3 -1 4 * 0 Normal ********************* 5 +1 6 Press the OK key. This displays the density selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is selected. 7 Press the U or V key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. Send/Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ] Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Correct. Bk Line [ Exit ] Send/Box Density:a b 1 Auto ********************* 2 Manual [ Exit In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Adjust/Maint.]. 2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Send/Box Density]. 4 Press the OK key. Send/Box Density appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. 6 Press the OK key. This displays the density selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is selected. ] a b Manual: 3 -1 4 * 0 Normal ********************* 5 +1 8-88 1 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) 7 Press the U or V key to select the density from [-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. Correct. Bk Line Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the optional document processor used. Paper feed direction 8 The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Off No correction performed. On(Low) Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off. On(High) Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On (Low). The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low). NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to keep the default ([Off]). Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Adjust/Maint.]. 8-89 Default Setting (System Menu) Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Correct. Bk Line [ Exit ] Correct. Bk Line: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On(Low) 3 On(High) 2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Correct. Bk Line]. 4 Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu. New Developer When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. ********************* [ Exit ] Adjust/Maint.: a b 1 Copy Denst. Adj. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 Correct. Bk Line [ Exit ] Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 New Developer [ Exit ] 8-90 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Adjust/Maint.]. 2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu appears. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) New Developer. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No 5 Press the U or V key to select [New Developer]. 6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/ Maint. menu. ] 8 OPERATION GUIDE 8-91 Default Setting (System Menu) Date/Timer Date/Timer settings include: • Date/Time …8-92 • Date Format …8-95 • Time Zone …8-97 • Summer Time …8-99 • Auto Error Clear …8-101 • Auto Sleep …8-103 • Auto Panel Reset …8-106 • Low Power Timer …8-108 • Unusable Time …8-109 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header. CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup. Use the procedure below to set the date and time. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-92 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in. Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] a b Date/Time: Year Month Day *2009* 01 01 (Time Zone:Tokyo ) 4 The Date Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time]. 6 Press the OK key. The screen to enter the date of Date/Time appears. 8 7 Set the date. Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Year / Month / Day) you want to enter. Press the U or V key to set each item. Date/Time: a b Hour Min. Second ****11 : 45: 50 (Time Zone:Tokyo ) 8 Press the OK key. The screen to enter the time of Date/Time appears. 9 Set the time. Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Hour / Min. / Second) you want to enter. Press the U or V key to set each item. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-93 Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-151) is running, the If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time, press [Yes](the Left Select key). 8-94 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Use the procedure below to select the date format. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] . a b Date Format: 1 *Month/Day/Year ********************* 2 Day/Month/Year 3 Year/Month/Day OPERATION GUIDE 4 The Date Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date Format] 6 Press the OK key. Date Format appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Month/Day/Year], [Day/Month/Year] or [Year/Month/Day]. 8-95 8 Default Setting (System Menu) 8 8-96 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT. Use the procedure below to set the time difference. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] a b Time Zone: 1 -12:00 Internati ********************* 2 -11:00 Midway 3 -10:00 Hawaii OPERATION GUIDE 4 The Date Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone]. 6 Press the OK key. Time Zone appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select your location. 8-97 8 Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear. 8-98 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date. Use the procedure below to set Summer Time. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Date Setting: a b 2 Date Format ********************* 3 Time Zone 4 Summer Time [ Exit ] a b Summer Time: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On OPERATION GUIDE 4 The Date Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time]. 6 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8-99 8 Default Setting (System Menu) 8 8-100 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. The following errors are automatically cleared. Cannot duplex print on this paper. Send error. Cannot connect to Authentication Server. Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan. Job not stored. Press [OK]. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled. Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Job is canceled. Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely. Scanner memory is full. Job is canceled. Print overrun. KPDL error. 8 USB memory error. Job is canceled. No multi copies. Press [OK]. Auto Error Clear ON/OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. 8-101 Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] Auto Err. Clear: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto Err. Clear]. 6 Press the OK key. Auto Err. Clear appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 30 seconds. If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed. NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear. Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-102 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] Err. Clear Timer: D b (5 - 495) ******30*sec. 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. 8 5 Press the U or V key to select [Err. Clear Timer]. 6 Press the OK key. Err. Clear Timer appears. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Error Clear Timer. Set the amount of time before clearing errors in seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Auto Sleep If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5 for Sleep Mode. Auto Sleep ON/OFF Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not. The default setting is Off. OPERATION GUIDE 8-103 Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary. Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] a b Auto Sleep: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8-104 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto Sleep]. 6 Press the OK key. Auto Sleep appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Sleep Timer If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute) Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 15 minutes. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] Sleep Timer: D b (1 - 240) ******15*min. OPERATION GUIDE 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Sleep Timer]. 6 Press the OK key. Sleep Timer appears. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Sleep Timer. Set the amount of time before entering the sleep state 8-105 8 Default Setting (System Menu) in minutes. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting. NOTE: Refer to page 8-30 for the default settings. Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting. The default setting is On. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 8-106 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Auto Panel Reset: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto Panel Reset]. 6 Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 90 seconds. NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear. 8 Use the procedure below to set the reset time. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu OPERATION GUIDE ] [ Login 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). ] 8-107 Default Setting (System Menu) Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] PanelReset Timer:D b (5 - 495) ******90*sec. 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Panel Reset Timer]. 6 Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Panel Reset Timer. Set the amount of time before resetting the message display on the panel in seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Low Power Timer You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode. Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments). The default setting is 2 minutes. For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4. Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-108 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] Low Power Timer: D b (1 - 240) *******2*min. 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Low Power Timer]. 6 Press the OK key. Low Power Timer appears. 8 7 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the Low Power Timer. Set the amount of time before entering the low power state in minutes. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Common Settings]. Unusable Time You can specify the prohibition period to use. Use the procedure below to set the unusable time. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 8-109 Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings: a b 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] a b Unusable Time: 7 Off 8 On ********************* [ Exit The Timer Settings menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Unusable Time]. 6 Press the OK key. Unusable Time appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On]. 8 Press the OK key. Start Time appears. 9 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the Start Time. ] a b Start Time: Hour Min. ***11*: 45 (Current Time 11:45) 8-110 4 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) End Time: a b Hour Min. ***07*: 00 (Current Time 11:45) 10 Press the OK key. End Time appears. 11 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the End Time. Unlock Code: a b (0000 - 0000) ********99*** 12 Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears. 13 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the unlock code. 14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-111 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional). Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 2,000 individual addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional). NOTE: • If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ] Edit Destination:a b 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [ Exit In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Edit Destination]. 2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book]. 4 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears. 5 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears. ] a b Addressbook: k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail Rdit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Address 4 Search(Name) 8-112 1 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Add Address: a b 1 Contact ********************* 2 Group Detail: Contact Name Sally [ C b 1/7 Edit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [Add Address]. 7 Press the OK key. Add Address appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Contact]. 9 Press the OK key. This displays the screen for editing destinations. NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has already been registered, the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book. 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item. Entering Contact Name Detail: Contact Name Sally [ Contact Name: Sally* S [ C b 1/7 Edit Press the Y or Z key to select [Contact Name]. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Enter the contact name. ] A b ABC Text 1 ] If creating a new contact name, the address number allocated to the destination is already entered. 4 OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key. The contact name is registered. 8-113 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Entering E-mail Address Detail: C b p E-mail Address: 4/7 t_maury@kyoceramita.N [ Edit Address Entry: * [ Press the Y or Z key to display E-mail Address. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Enter the e-mail address. ] B b ABC Text 1 ] NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28. 4 Press the OK key. The e-mail address is registered. Entering Folder (SMB/FTP) Address Folder (SMB) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. Item Max. No. of Characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the sending computer 64 chars Path Path to the folder used to save files E.g. "\User\ScanData" 128 chars Login User Name User name for folder access For example, abcdnet\james.smith 64 chars Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars * 8-114 Description If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the "Host name: port number" format. (E.g. SMBhostname: 140) OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Folder (FTP) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. Item Description Max. No. of Characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the sending computer 64 chars Path Path to the folder used to save files E.g. "\User\ScanData" 128 chars Login User Name User name for folder access For example, abcdnet\james.smith 64 chars Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars Encryption If secure communication is On, encryption method can be selected from Auto, DES, 3DES and AES. - * 8 If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Hostname: port number" format. (E.g. FTPhostname: 140) Detail: G Folder(SMB): Ntid7004 [ Edit Host Name(SMB): Osaka SD* [ C b 4/6 Press the Y or Z key to display Folder(SMB) or Folder(FTP). 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Enter the host name. ] A b ABC Text 1 ] or Host Name(FTP): Osaka SD* A b ABC [ Text OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28. ] 8-115 Default Setting (System Menu) A b Path: SD3\report* ABC [ Text Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO* [ Yes ] [ No Enter the path name. 6 Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. 7 Enter the login user name. 8 Press the OK key. Login Password appears. 9 Enter the login password. ] Check the connection. Are you sure? [ 5 ] A b ABC Text Press the OK key. Path appears. ] Login User Name: A b Maury* S ABC [ Text 4 10 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. ] NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-64) is set to [On], screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear. Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens. 8-116 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Dest. Confirm.: a b p Morgan@kyoceramitaN b 0667640000********* b 0667741234 [ Exit ] 11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a connection with the entered destination. If the connection is successful, Connected. is displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Completed. is displayed and the folder (SMB/FTP) address is registered. If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen shown in step 2 reappears. Check and reenter the destination. Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and 20 numbers for groups. Detail: Address Number: 053 [ C b 6/6 Edit 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number. 4 Press the OK key. The address number is registered. ] Address Number: D b (001 - 120) *****053* NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already registered, the screen will display This address number is already registered. and return to the screen of step 2. OPERATION GUIDE 8-117 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be included in the group must be added first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per a group. Use the procedure below to register a group. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ] Edit Destination:a b 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [ Exit In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Edit Destination]. 2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book]. 4 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears. 5 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Add Address]. ] Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add Address ********************* 8-118 1 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Add Address: a b 1 Contact 2 *Group ********************* Detail: Group Name: GUI Section [ C b 1/4 Edit ] 7 Press the OK key. Add Address appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Group]. 9 Press the OK key. This displays the screen for editing groups. NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already been registered, the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book. 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item. Entering Group Name Detail: Group Name: GUI Section [ Group Name: GUI* S [ C b 1/4 Edit Press the Y or Z key to display Group Name. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Enter the group name. ] A b ABC Text 1 ] If creating a new group name, the address number allocated to the destination is already entered. 4 OPERATION GUIDE Press the OK key. The group name is registered. 8-119 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Entering Group Member Detail: Group Member: 30 [ C b 2/3 Edit a b Menu: 1 Detail 2 Delete 3 Add Member ********************* Contacts: a b l Fiala ********************* l Maury l Morgan [ Menu ] 8-120 Press the Y or Z key to display Group Member. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays the list of destinations registered to the group. 3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group editing menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Add Member]. 5 Press the OK key. This displays the list of destinations registered in the Address Book. ] Group Member: a b p Sally ********************* b Morgan G Morgan [ Menu ] l b p G 1 Sally: a b 0667643277 sally@kyoceramita.N Ntid7004 [ Menu ] NOTE: If 100 members have already been registered in the group, the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the Group Member. 6 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to add to the group. 7 Press the OK key. This displays the sending address registered to the selected destination. 8 Press the U or V key to select the sending address. 9 Press the OK key. The selected destination is added to the group and the screen returns to Group Member. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group, the screen will display This address is already registered. and return to the screen of step 7. Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below. Group Member: a b p Sally ********************* b Morgan G Morgan [ Menu ] a b Menu: 1 Detail 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add Member Delete. Are you sure? z p Sally [ Yes ] [ No 1 While Group Member is displayed, press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays the list of destinations registered to the group. 2 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to delete. 3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group editing menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [Delete]. 5 Press the OK key. A confirmation message appears. 6 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Group Member. ] Entering Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 2,500 numbers for individuals and 500 numbers for groups. OPERATION GUIDE 8-121 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Detail: Address Number: 019 [ C b 4/4 Edit 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number. 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry screen appears. 3 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number. 4 Press the OK key. The address number is registered. ] Address Number: D b (001 - 120) *****053* NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already registered, the screen will display This address number is already registered. and return to the screen of step 2. Editing a Destination Edit/delete the destinations (individuals) you added to the Address Book. Use the procedure below to edit a destination. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b ; Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. [ Exit ] Edit Destination:a b 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [ 8-122 Exit 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Edit Destination]. 2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book]. ] OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail Rdit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Address 4 Search(Name) A b 1/7 Detail: Contact name Sally [ Edit 4 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to edit. 6 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Detail/Edit]. 8 Press the OK key. This displays the screen for editing the selected destination. The screen shown is the one when an individual's destination is selected. ] 9 Edit items as necessary. For how to edit each item, refer to Adding an Individual Destination on page 8-112 and Adding a Group on page 8-118. 10 After completing editing, press the OK key. A Overwrite. Are you sure? z p Sally [ Yes ] [ confirmation screen appears. No ] 11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. OPERATION GUIDE 8-123 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Destination on One-touch Key This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them. The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below: No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15 No.5 No6 No.7 No.8 No.16 No.17 No.18 No.19 No.9 No.10 No.11 No.20 No.21 No.22 SHIFT NOTE: Refer to One-Touch Key on page 3-7 for how to use them. Registering new destination Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch key. Select Key No.: a b 1 No. 1 ********************* 2 No. 12 [ Exit 1 The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is pressed and held. ] Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] In the basic screen, press the one-touch key to which you want to register the destination and hold it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select the key number to which you want to register the destination. 3 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to register. NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book, refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-29. 5 8-124 Press the OK key. The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Editing One-touch Key Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key. Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key. Select Key No.: a b 1 No. 1 ********************* 2 No. 12 [ Exit [ Exit In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where you want to edit the destination and hold it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears. The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is pressed and held. ] a b Key Edit: 1 Edit 2 Detail 3 Delete 1 2 Press the U or V key to select the key number where you want to edit the destination. 3 Press the OK key. The Key Edit appears. ] 8 4 Press the U or V key to select [Edit]. NOTE: If you select [Delete] here and press the OK key, you can delete the registration of the destination. If you press [Yes] (the Left Select key) in the screen that appears, Completed. is displayed and the registration of the destination is deleted. Addressbook: a b k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 5 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to newly register. NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book, refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-29. OPERATION GUIDE 8-125 Default Setting (System Menu) Overwrite. Are you sure? z No. 1 [ 8-126 Yes ] [ No 7 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. 8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key, overwriting the previous one. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. ] OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the System Restart the printer without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.) Use the procedure below to restart the system. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 3 Security Level 4 Restart ********************* 5 Op Functions [ Exit ] Restart. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 8 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Restart]. 4 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. 5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The printer is restarted. ] If you press [No] (the Right Select key), the printer does not restart and the screen returns to the System menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-127 Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setup The following network settings are available. • LAN Interface Setup …8-128 • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-129 • TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-129 • NetWare Setup …8-130 • AppleTalk Setup …8-132 • Protocol Detail …8-135 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto. Use the procedure below to select the interface. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk 8-128 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [LAN Interface]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) LAN Interface: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 10Base-Half 3 10Base-Full 6 Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select the desired LAN interface. The available LAN interfaces are as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Half 100Base-Full 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. 8 TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-12 about the procedures. TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu OPERATION GUIDE ] [ Login 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). ] 8-129 Default Setting (System Menu) System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] TCP/IP Settings: a b 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] a b IPv6 Setting: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On [ Exit 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. 6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [IPv6 Setting]. 8 Press the OK key. IPv6 Setting appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. ] 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. NetWare Setup Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto, Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings is "Off". Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting. 8-130 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] NetWare: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On Frame Type: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 802.3 3 Ether-II 2 The System menu appears. 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [NetWare]. 6 Press the OK key. NetWare appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. If you select [On] and press the OK key, Frame Type appears. Press the U or V key to select the desired frame type. The available frame types are as follows: Auto 802.3 OPERATION GUIDE 8-131 Default Setting (System Menu) Ether-II 802.2 SNAP 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-127. AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2-22 about the procedures. WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-SCAN setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 8-132 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] WSD-SCAN: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [WSD-SCAN]. 6 Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu. 8 WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-PRINT setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 8-133 Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] a b WSD-PRINT: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8-134 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [WSD-PRINT]. 6 Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Protocol Detail Make other network related settings. Item Description Default Setting Restarting the System* NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI. On × LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol. On z FTP (Server) Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP. On z FTP (Client) Select whether or not to send documents using FTP, and the number of the port to be used. On Port number: 21 × Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port. On z LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP. Off × SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP. On z SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3. Off z SMB Select whether or not to send documents using SMB, and the number of the port to be used. On Port number: 139 × SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP. Off × POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3. Off × HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP. On z HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-138. On z OPERATION GUIDE 8 8-135 Default Setting (System Menu) Item Restarting the System* Description Default Setting IPP Select whether or not to use IPP, and the number of the port to be used. Off Port number: 631 z IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-138. On z * z: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. ×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed. Use the procedure below. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 8-136 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) TCP/IP Settings: a b 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting 4 Protocol Detail ********************* [ Exit ] Protocol Detail: a b 1 NetBEUI ********************* 2 SNMPv3 3 FTP(Server) [ Exit ] FTP(Client): a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Protocol Detail]. 8 Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select the item for which you want to make settings. 10 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen for the item selected in step 9. The screen shown is the one when [FTP(Client)] is selected. 11 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. Port Number: (1 - 65535) *******21* D b If you select [On] for each of [FTP(Client)] and [IPP] and press the OK key, a port number entry screen appears. Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set the port number. 12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu. OPERATION GUIDE 8-137 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data. The following network security settings are available. • SSL Setting …8-138 • SNMPv3 Setting …8-143 • IPSec Setting …8-144 SSL Setting This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. You can use SSL Setup to select whether or not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings. SSL Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 8-138 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setting: a b 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL ********************* 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security [ Exit ] a b SSL: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On [ Exit 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. 6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [SSL]. 8 Press the OK key. SSL appears. 8 ] 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. IPP Security Specify the protocol to be used for IPP. The default setting is IPP/IPP over SSL. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu OPERATION GUIDE ] [ Login 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). ] 8-139 Default Setting (System Menu) System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL 2 IPP Security ********************* 3 HTTP Security [ Exit ] a b IPP Security: 1 IPP/IPP over SSL 2 *IPPoverSSL only ********************* 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. 6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [IPP Security]. 8 Press the OK key. IPP Security appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [IPP/IPP over SSL] or [IPPoverSSL only]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. HTTP Security Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP. The default setting is HTTPS only. Use the procedure below to make the setting. 8-140 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security ********************* [ Exit ] a b HTTP Security: 1 HTTP/HTTPS 2 *HTTPS only ********************* OPERATION GUIDE In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. 6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [HTTP Security]. 8 Press the OK key. HTTP Security appears. 8-141 Default Setting (System Menu) 9 Press the U or V key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or [HTTPS only]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. LDAP Security Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] 8-142 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Secure Protocol: a b 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security 4 LDAP Security ********************* [ Exit ] LDAP Security: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 LDAPv3/TLS 3 LDAP over SSL 6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [LDAP Security]. 8 Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears. 9 Press the U or V key to select [Off], [LDAPv3/TLS] or [LDAP over SSL]. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. SNMPv3 Setting Sets up SNMPv3. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below. Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8-135 about the procedures. OPERATION GUIDE 8-143 8 Default Setting (System Menu) IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] Network Setting: a b 4 WSD-SCAN 5 WSD-PRINT 6 IPSec ********************* [ Exit ] IPSec: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8-144 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [IPSec]. 6 Press the OK key. IPSec appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule Setting appears. Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. Rule Setting: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. 8 OPERATION GUIDE 8-145 Default Setting (System Menu) Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. The following interface block settings are available: • USB Host (USB memory slot setting) • USB Device (USB interface setting) • Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) USB Host (USB memory slot setting) This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting 2 I/F Block Set. ********************* 3 Security Level [ Exit ] I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host ********************* 2 USB Device 3 Option I/F [ Exit ] 8-146 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [USB Host]. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) USB Host: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block 6 Press the OK key. USB Host appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu. USB Device (USB interface setting) This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] 1 8 When you are performing user management and have not logged in, a login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Login User Name: L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] System: a b 1 Network Setting 2 I/F Block Set. ********************* 3 Security Level [ Exit ] I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host 2 USB Device ********************* 3 Option I/F [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System], and press the OK key. 2 The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [USB Device]. 8-147 Default Setting (System Menu) USB Device: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block 8-148 6 Press the OK key. USB Device appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu. OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] System: a b 1 Network Setting 2 I/F Block Set. ********************* 3 Security Level [ Exit ] I/F Block Set.: a b 1 USB Host 2 USB Device 3 Option I/F ********************* [ Exit ] a b Option I/F: 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block OPERATION GUIDE 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [System]. 2 Press the OK key. The System menu appears. 3 Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.]. 4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears. 5 Press the U or V key to select [Option I/F]. 6 Press the OK key. Option I/F appears. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu. 8-149 8 Default Setting (System Menu) Security Level (Security Level setting) The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu. 8-150 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting (System Menu) Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Op Functions Although nothing is currently displayed, when the optional functions that will be released in the future is installed, the licenses can be set using this menu. 8 OPERATION GUIDE 8-151 Default Setting (System Menu) 8-152 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement. • • Cleaning........................................................................9-2 Toner Container ............................................................9-5 OPERATION GUIDE 9-1 Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality. CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent. IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents. Cleaning the Machine To avoid print quality problems, the interior of the machine must be cleaned with every toner container replacement. 1 9-2 Open the front cover. OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 2 Lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine. 3 Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands. NOTE: The drum unit is sensitive to light. Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes. 4 Place the drum unit flat on a clean, level surface. IMPORTANT: Do not place the drum unit on end. 5 9 Use a clean, lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the metal registration roller. IMPORTANT: Take care not to touch the transfer roller (black) during cleaning. OPERATION GUIDE 9-3 Maintenance 6 On the drum unit, slide the main charger cleaner (green) back and forth 2 or 3 times to clean the charger wire, then return it to its original position (CLEANER HOME POSITION ). IMPORTANT: Remove the fixing tape on the main charger cleaner before cleaning for the first time. After cleaning, make sure you restore the main charger cleaner to its home position. 9-4 7 When cleaning is complete, return the drum unit to the original position. 8 Return the developer unit to its position, aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in the machine. Then, close the front cover. OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance Toner Container When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner. Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality. CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Toner Container Replacement 1 Open the front cover. 2 Turn the lock lever to the unlock position. Push the lock lever to the position marked by the arrow and pull out the toner container. NOTE: Put the old toner container in the plastic bag (supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal. 3 OPERATION GUIDE Take the new toner container out of the toner kit. Shake the new toner container at least 5 times as shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container. 9-5 9 Maintenance 9-6 4 Remove the label from the toner container. 5 Install the new toner container in the machine. Push firmly on the top of the container at the positions marked PUSH, until you hear a click. 6 Turn the lock lever to the lock position. 7 Close the front cover. OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non-use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet. We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine is used next time. Moving the Machine When you move the machine: • Move it gently. • Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine. • Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine. WARNING: If you ship the machine, remove and pack the developer unit and drum unit in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the machine. 9 OPERATION GUIDE 9-7 Maintenance 9-8 OPERATION GUIDE 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine. • • • Solving Malfunctions ...................................................10-2 Responding to Error Messages ..................................10-5 Clearing Paper Jams ................................................ 10-11 OPERATION GUIDE 10-1 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. Symptom Checkpoints Reference Page Corrective Actions The operation panel does not respond when the main power switch is turned on. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. — Pressing the Start key does not produce copies. Is there a message on the Message Display? Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly. — Is the machine in Sleep mode? Press the Power key to recover the machine from Sleep mode. The machine will be ready to copy within 45 seconds. 3-5 Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen, place them face-down and align them with the original size indicator plates. 2-44 When placing originals in the optional document processor, place them face-up. 2-46 Is the machine in Auto Density mode? Set the correct density level for auto density. — Is the machine in Manual Density mode? Select the correct density level. 5-13 When changing the default density level, adjust the density manually and choose the desired level. — Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container? Shake the toner container from side to side about several times. 9-5 Is there a message indicating the addition of toner? Replace the toner container. 9-5 Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-28 Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. 4-10 Is the machine in Auto Density mode? Set the correct density level for auto density. — Is the machine in Manual Density mode? Select the correct density level. 5-13 When changing the default density level, adjust the density manually and choose the desired level. — Blank sheets are ejected. Printouts are too light. Printouts are too dark. 10-2 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly). Is the original a printed photograph? Set the image quality to [Photo]. 5-12 Printouts are not clear. Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original? Select appropriate image quality. 5-12 Printouts are dirty. Is the platen or the document processor dirty? Clean the platen or the document processor. — Is the charger wire dirty? Clean the charger wire. — Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in very humid conditions? Clean the charger wire. — Images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen, align them with the original size indicator plates. 2-44 When placing originals in the optional document processor, align the original width guides securely before placing the originals. 2-45 Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width guides. 2-45 Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. 2-28 Is the paper of the supported type? Is it in good condition? Remove the paper, turn it over, and reload it. 2-28 Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-28 Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine? Remove any jammed paper. 10-11 Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-28 Is the paper set in a proper orientation? Change the orientation in which the paper is positioned. — Paper often jams. Printouts are wrinkled. OPERATION GUIDE 10 10-3 Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot print. Checkpoints Reference Page Corrective Actions Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. — Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. 3-2 Is the printer cable connected? Connect the correct printer cable securely. 2-5 Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected? Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable. 2-5 3-2 Is the print job paused? Press [Resume] to resume printing. 7-19 Documents are printed improperly. Are the application software settings at the PC set properly? Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly. — While the operation panel was being used, the keys locked up and do not respond when pressed. Is the operation panel locked? Check the panel lock setting in COMMAND CENTER and change the setting if necessary. KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Cannot print with USB memory. Was the USB memory formatted with a machine other than this machine? Format the USB memory with this machine. Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host settings. 8-146 Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine. — — When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC, an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally. Have you selected 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution? Select a scan resolution other than 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi Super Fine when sending an image. 5-14 USB memory not recognized. Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine. — — Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host settings. 8-146 The inside of the machine may be dirty. Check the toner container and if necessary replace. 9-5 Clean the charger wire. — Check the main charger cleaner of the drum unit is in its original position. — Vertical streaks appear on prints. 10-4 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. Alphanumeric Corrective Actions Reference Page Error Message Checkpoints Load paper in cassette 1. Is the indicated cassette out of paper? Load paper. 2-29 Load paper in MP Tray. Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray? Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicated on the Message Display. 2-32 Add toner. – Replace the toner container. 9-5 Cannot connect to Authentication Server. – Press the OK key and check the following items: — • Registration to Authentication Serve • Password and computer address for Authentication Server • Connection of Network Cannot duplex print on this paper. Did you select a paper size/ media type that cannot be duplex printed? Select the available paper type. Press the OK key to print without using Duplex. 3-14 Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled. – This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting. Press the OK key. — Close front cover. Is there any cover which is open? Close the cover indicated on the control panel. — Close Document Processor. Is the document processor open? Close the document processor. — Is the top cover of the document processor open? Close the top cover of the document processor. 2-45 Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print. – The job is canceled. Press the OK key. — Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan. – The job is canceled. Press the OK key. — Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Job is canceled. – FAX box is full, and no further storage is available. The job is canceled. Press the OK key. — OPERATION GUIDE 10 10-5 Troubleshooting Error Message Checkpoints Reference Page Corrective Actions Incorrect Login User Name or Password. Job Is canceled. – Enter correct login user name or password. — Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled. Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded? The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting. Cannot print any more. This job is canceled. Press the OK key. — Machine failure. Call service. – Internal error has occurred. Make a note of the error code displayed on the Message Display. Turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Service Representative. — Is Error code "C4200" displayed? Internal condensation has occurred as a result of a sudden change in temperature. Turn off the machine and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes, and then back on again. If this message still remains, turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Service Representative. — Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely. – Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up. Press the OK key to print the scanned pages. The print job cannot be processed completely. Press the STOP key to cancel the job. — Paper jammed. – If a paper jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the Message Display. Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper. 10-11 USB memory error. Job is canceled. – This job is canceled. Press the OK key. — Place original and press Start key. – Remove originals from the document processor, put them back in their original order, and place them again. Press the Start key to resume printing. Press the STOP key to cancel the job. 2-46 Remove original from document processor. Are there any originals left in the document processor? Remove originals from the document processor. — 10-6 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Error Message Scanner memory is full. Job is canceled. Send error. #### OPERATION GUIDE Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page – Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner. The job is canceled. Press the OK key. — Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded? Press the OK key to print, send or store the scanned pages. Press the STOP key to cancel printing, sending or storing. — – An error has occurred during transmission. The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows. 1101: The server name of the SMTP server is not set correctly or the host name is incorrect when sending scan data to an FTP server. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly. 1102: The login user name is incorrect or the domain name has not been entered. Enter login user name, domain name and password correctly. 1103: The network path name is incorrect or you do not have access to the folder specified. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the path name correctly. 1104: No recipient address. Enter Email address correctly. — 10 10-7 Troubleshooting Error Message Send error. #### Checkpoints – Reference Page Corrective Actions 1105: E-mail - The SMTP protocol setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMTP protocol setting. Scan to PC (SMB) - SMB setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMB setting. Scan to PC (FTP) - FTP setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the FTP setting. 1106: The sender address setting under E-mail: SMTP is not registered. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the sender address. 2101, 2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, 2203, 3101: The network cable is disconnected or the hub that it is connected to is not operating properly. Check the cable and the hub. Otherwise, the server name or the host name of the SMTP server is not set correctly. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly. 2204: The E-mail size exceeds the acceptable send data capacity. Decrease the size or resolution of the scanned data to be transmitted and resend the E-mail. 5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, 7102, 720f: Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this error occurs several times, make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative.(Refer to the corrective action for the error message “ An error has occurred.”) 9181: The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately. — — — Error occurred. Turn the main power switch off and on. – System error has occurred. Turn the main power switch off and on. — Incorrect account ID. – The Account ID does not match. Check the registered Account ID. — 10-8 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page The phone receiver is off the hook. Hang Up. – Put down the receiver. — File is not found. Job is canceled. – The specified file is not found. The job is canceled. Press the OK key. — Top tray is full of Paper. Remove the paper. – Remove paper from the top tray, and press the OK key to resume the job. — Unknown toner Installed. – If the toner container was taken from a different machine of the same model while it was displaying the Add toner. message, ignore the message and use the toner. — Unknown toner Installed. PC – This message is displayed if the installed toner container's regional specification does not match the machine's. Insufficient memory. Cannot start the job – Further scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory. Press the OK key to print the scanned pages. Press the Cancel key to cancel the printing job. OPERATION GUIDE — 10 10-9 Troubleshooting Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes If an error lamp flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the error lamp flashes for 1.5 seconds, check the following. Symptom Cannot send fax. 10-10 Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Is the modular cord connected correctly? Connect the modular cord correctly. — Is Permitted FAX No. or Permitted ID No. registered correctly? Check Permitted FAX No. and Permitted ID No.. FAX Operation Guide Chapter 6 "Registering Permit FAX No." and "Registering Permit ID No." Has a communication error occurred? Check error codes in the TX/RX Result Report and Activity Report. If the error code starts with "U" or "E", perform the corresponding procedure. FAX Operation Guide Appendix "Error Code List" Is the destination FAX line busy? Send again. — Does the destination FAX machine respond? Send again. — Is there an error other than above? Contact your Service Representative. — OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below. Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs, the error message displays the location of the jam. Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page Document processor (Option) 10-16 Inside the machine 10-14 MP Tray 10-11 Cassettes 10-12 Duplexer 10-12 Rear cover 10-15 Precautions with Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. • Do not reuse jammed papers. • If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming. • Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again. CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting burned. Online Help Messages When Paper Jam is displayed, press [Help](the Press to display the next step or press Left Select key) to display the procedure to clear the jam. to display the previous step. Press the OK key to exit the online help message display. Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the MP tray. OPERATION GUIDE 10-11 10 Troubleshooting 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray. 2 Reload the MP tray. Open and close the top cover to clear the error and the machine warms up and resumes printing. Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in paper cassette or paper feeder. 1 Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder. 2 Remove any partially fed paper. IMPORTANT: Do not try to remove paper that has already been partially fed. Proceed to Inside the Machine on page 10-14. NOTE: Check to see if paper is loaded correctly. If not, reload the paper. 3 Push the cassette back in securely. The machine warms up and resumes printing. Duplexer Paper is jammed in the duplexer. Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below. 1 10-12 Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the machine. OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 2 Open the duplexer’s cover in front of the machine and remove any jammed paper. Open the duplexer’s cover at the rear of the machine and remove any jammed paper. 3 Push the cassette back in securely, and open and close the top cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and resumes printing. 10 OPERATION GUIDE 10-13 Troubleshooting Inside the Machine 1 Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the machine. Remove any partially fed paper. 2 Open the front cover, and lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine. 3 Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands. CAUTION: The fuser unit inside the machine is hot. Do not touch it, as it may result in burn injury. NOTE: The drum is sensitive to light. Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes. 10-14 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 4 If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers, pull it along the normal running direction of the paper. 5 Return the drum unit to its position, aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in the machine. 6 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container, back into the machine. Close the front cover. The machine warms up and resumes printing. 10 Rear Cover Follow the steps below to clear paper jams of the rear cover. 1 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper by pulling it out. CAUTION: The fuser unit inside the machine is hot. Do not touch it, as it may result in burn injury. OPERATION GUIDE 10-15 Troubleshooting If the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit, open the fuser cover and remove the paper by pulling it out. 2 Close the rear cover, and open and close the top cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and resumes printing. Optional Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor. 1 Remove all of the originals from the document feed tray. 2 Open the left cover of the document processor. 3 Remove the jammed original. If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to remove, proceed to the next step. 10-16 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 4 Open the document processor. 5 Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine. 6 Close the document processor. 7 Place the originals. 10 OPERATION GUIDE 10-17 Troubleshooting 10-18 OPERATION GUIDE 11 Management This chapter explains the following operations. • • • User Login Administration........................................... 11-2 Job Accounting ......................................................... 11-13 Checking the Counter ............................................... 11-37 OPERATION GUIDE 11-1 Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to log in. Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator. First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration. Enable user login administration. (page 11-2) T Add a user.(page 11-6) T Log out.(page 11-5) T The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-5) Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods: Item 11-2 Description Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine. Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page. OPERATION GUIDE Management Use the procedure below to enable user login administration. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. 1 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. ] NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List [ OPERATION GUIDE Exit 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account]. 3 Press the OK key. The User/Job Account menu appears. 4 Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [User Login]. ] 11-3 11 Management User Login: a b 1 *Off 2 Local Authentic. ********************* 3 Netwk Authentic. 7 Press the OK key. User Login appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key. Select [Off] to disable user login administration. If you select [Netwk Authentic.], enter the host name and domain name of the authentication server (up to 64 and 256 characters, respectively), and then press the OK key. Then, select the server type from [NTLM] or [Kerberos] and then press the OK key. A b Host Name: GUI* [ ABC Text ] NOTE: If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings. • Network Authentication setting of the machine • User property of the Authentication Server • Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the User Login Set. menu. 11-4 OPERATION GUIDE Management Login/Logout Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Login Log in using the procedure below. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 1 If the screen below appears during the operations, perform the following login operations. 2 Press the OK key, enter the login user name, and then press the OK key. 3 Press the V key to select [Login Password], press the OK key, enter the login password, and then press the OK key. 4 Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select key). ] NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. Logout To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/login password entry screen. Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases: OPERATION GUIDE • When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode • When auto sleep is activated • When auto panel reset is activated • When auto low power mode is activated 11-5 11 Management Adding a User This adds a new user. You can add Up to 21 users (including the default login user name). The table below explains the user information to be registered. Item Description User Name* Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). Login User Name* Enter the login user name to log in (up to 32 characters). The same login user name cannot be registered. Login Password* Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters). Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access privileges. Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can log in without entering the account ID. Refer to Job Accounting on page 11-13. E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function. * Mandatory at user registration. NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. The following are the default user's properties. User Name: Login User Name: Login Password: Access Level: DeviceAdmin 2800 2800 Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your security. Use the procedure below to register a new user. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. 11-6 1 Log in as a user with administrator rights. 2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. OPERATION GUIDE Management Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 4 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. ] NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login 2 Local User List ********************* 3 IC Card Setting [ Exit ] Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin ********************* [ Menu In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.]. 6 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears. 11 7 Press the U or V key to select [Local User List]. 8 Press the OK key. Local User List appears. 9 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the U or V key to select [Add User], and then press the OK key. ] Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add User ********************* OPERATION GUIDE 5 11-7 Management T b S User Name: * ABC [ Text Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin l Admin l User 1 ********************* [ Menu ] [ C b 3/6 Edit the login user name in the next screen, and then press the OK key. ] l User01: a b 1 Exit ********************* 2 Detail Detail: Login Password: OOOOOOOOOOO 10 Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter 11 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then press the OK key. Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see information of the registered users. 12 In Local User List, press the U or V key to select the added user and then press the OK key. 13 Press the Y or Z key to select [Login Password:], press [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the login password, and then press the OK key. ] 14 Enter the same login password to confirm and press the OK key. Detail: C b p E-mailAddress: 4/6 ******@abcdef.jp [ Detail: Access Level: Administrator Edit [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the e-mail address, and then press the OK key. ] C b 5/6 [ Change ] 11-8 15 Press the Z key to select [E-mailAddress:], press 16 Press the Z key to select [Access Level:], press [Change] (the Right Select key), select the user access privilege, and then press the OK key. NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator, [Change] is not displayed. OPERATION GUIDE Management Detail: C b Account Name: 6/6 k KyoceramitaOsaka [ Change ] 17 Press the Z key to select [Account Name:], press [Change] (the Right Select key), select the account, and then press the OK key. NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is not displayed. 18 After entering the user information, press the OK key again. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Local User List. Changing User Properties User information can be changed. It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges. Use the procedure below to change the user properties. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login ] 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. OPERATION GUIDE 11-9 11 Management User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] User Login Set.: a b 1 User Login 2 Local User List ********************* [ Exit 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Local User List]. 7 Press the OK key. Local User List appears. ] Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin ********************* l User1 l User2 [ Menu ] The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing user information Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin l Admin ********************* l User1 [ Menu ] C b 1/6 Detail: User Name: User1 [ 11-10 Edit 1 Press the U or V key to select the user whose information you want to change, and then press the OK key. 2 In the same fashion as registering a new user, press the Y or Z key to select the desired item, press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change information, and then press the OK key. 3 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary. 4 After completing changing the user information, press the OK key again. ] OPERATION GUIDE Management 5 The overwrite confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List. Deleting a user Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin l Admin ********************* l User1 [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add User 1 Press the U or V key to select the user you want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select key). 2 Press the U or V key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key. 3 In the delete confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user is deleted and the screen returns to Local User List. Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Reject The job is rejected (not printed). Permit The job is permitted to be printed. OPERATION GUIDE 11-11 11 Management Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Sys. Menu/Count.: a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. ] NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account. Set. 3 Unknown ID Job ********************* [ Exit ] Unknown ID Job: a b 1 *Reject ********************* 2 Permit 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Unknown ID Job]. 5 Press the OK key. Unknown ID Job appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Reject] or [Permit]. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu. 11-12 OPERATION GUIDE Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. • Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts. • Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security. • Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID. • Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined. • Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. • Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined. First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup. Enable job accounting. (page 11-13) T Add an account. (page 11-16) T Log out. (page 11-15) T Other users log in for operations. (page 11-15) 11 Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 11-13 Management Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 3 ] If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account. Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] a b Job Accounting: 1 *Off ********************* 2 On • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Job Accounting]. 7 Press the OK key. Job Accounting appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [On]. To disable job accounting, select [Off]. 9 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account. Set. menu. NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID. 11-14 OPERATION GUIDE Management Login/Logout If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Account ID: b ******************* [Counter ] 1 In the screen below, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and press the OK key. NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the Clear key and enter the account ID again. If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID. By pressing [Counter] (the Left Select key), you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password appears. Enter a login user name and password to log in. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 11-5.) If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 116.) 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps. Logout When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen. OPERATION GUIDE 11-15 11 Management Managing Accounts This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required. Item Description Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999). Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22. Use the procedure below to register a new account. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. ] NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 11-16 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. OPERATION GUIDE Management Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Each Job Account 5 Account. List ********************* 6 Default Setting [ Exit ] a b Account. List: k UI R&D DEP. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add Account ********************* Account Name: * [ Account ID: T b S ABC Text 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Account. List]. 7 Press the OK key. Account. List appears. 8 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the U or V key to select [Add Account], and then press the OK key. 9 Enter the account name and press the OK key. 11 ] b ******************* S a b k Dep.01: 1 Exit ********************* 2 Detail 10 Enter the account code and press the OK key. NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID. 11 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then press the OK key. Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see information of the registered accounts. 12 Account. List is displayed and the new account is added to the account list. OPERATION GUIDE 11-17 Management Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account. Use the procedure below to manage accounts. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. ] NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Each Job Account 5 Account. List ********************* 6 Default Setting [ Exit ] 11-18 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Account. List]. OPERATION GUIDE Management Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] 7 Press the OK key. Account. List appears. The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing account information 1 Press the U or V key to select the account whose information you want to change, and then press the OK key. 2 Press the Y or Z key to select the item you want to change, press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change account information and restriction of use, and then press the OK key. a b Account. List: k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] Detail: C b Account Name: 1/7 Osaka GUI Design [ Edit ] NOTE: Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22. Overwrite. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [ OPERATION GUIDE Yes ] [ No 3 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary. 4 After completing changing the account information, press the OK key again. A confirmation screen appears. 5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account information is changed. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List. ] 11-19 11 Management Deleting an account Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add Account Delete. Are you sure? z k UI R&D DEPT. [ Yes ] [ No 1 Press the U or V key to select the account you want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select key). 2 Press the U or V key to select [Delete]. 3 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. 4 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account is deleted.Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List. ] Managing the Copier/Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-30 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-35 for details. Use the procedure below to set the counting methods. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] 11-20 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Management Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 3 ] If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set: a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] Default Setting: a b 1 Apply Limit 2 Copy/Print Count ********************* 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ] Copy/Print Count:a b 1 Total 2 *Split ********************* • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting]. 7 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Copy/Print Count]. 9 Press the OK key. Copy/Print Count appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select [Total] or [Split]. OPERATION GUIDE 11-21 11 Management 11 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available. The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-20. Restriction Items [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Print Restriction (Copier) Limits the number of sheets used for copying. Print Restriction (Printer) Limits the number of sheets used for printing. Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Fax TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (For FS1128MFP only) [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item 11-22 Detail Print Restriction Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Fax TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (For FS1128MFP only) OPERATION GUIDE Management Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Item Description Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. Reject Usage Restriction is applied. Use the procedure below to select a restriction method. Account. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] Detail: C b Print Restrict.: 4/6 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of Managing Accounts on page 11-16. 2 In Account. List, press the U or V key to select the account to which you want to set restriction of use, and then press the OK key. 3 Press the Y or Z key to select the item to be restricted and then press [Edit] (the Right Select key). Off [ Edit ] Detail: C b Print Restrict.: 4/7 Copier Off [ Edit ] Print Restrict.: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Counter Limit 3 Reject Usage [ Exit ] OPERATION GUIDE 11 When selecting [Split] in Copy/Print Count, screen changes as shown in the left. 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired restriction method and then press the OK key. 11-23 Management If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit number of pages in the next screen, and then press the OK key. Limit Pages: D b (1 - 9999999) **123456*pages Overwrite. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [ Yes ] [ No 5 Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary. 6 Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen appears. 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The restriction of use is changed. Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List. ] Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below describes the action taken. Item Description Immediately * Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected. Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message. * The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box. Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 User/Job Account ********************* 2 User Property 3 Common Settings [ Exit ] 11-24 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. OPERATION GUIDE Management Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 3 ] If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Each Job Account 5 Account. List 6 Default Setting ********************* [ Exit ] Default Setting: a b 1 Apply Limit ********************* 2 Copy/Print Count 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ] a b Apply Limit: 1 Immediately 2 *Subsequently ********************* 3 Alert Only [ Exit ] • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting]. 7 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Apply Limit]. 9 Press the OK key. Apply Limit appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select [Immediately], [Subsequently] or [Alert Only]. OPERATION GUIDE 11-25 11 Management 11 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. 11-26 OPERATION GUIDE Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments. The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/ Printer Counts on page 11-20. Available Settings [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying. Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing. Scan Restriction (Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying). FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. (For FS-1128MFP only) [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. Scan Restriction (Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying). FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. (For FS-1128MFP only) OPERATION GUIDE 11 11-27 Management Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 User/Job Account ********************* 2 User Property 3 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu ] [ Login 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. ] NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set.:a b 1 Each Job Account 2 Account. List 3 Default Setting ********************* [ Exit ] 11-28 • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting]. OPERATION GUIDE Management Default Setting: a b 1 Apply Limit ********************* 2 Copy/Print Count 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ] Counter Limit: a b 1 Copy Restriction ********************* 2 Print Restrict. 3 ScanRest.(Other) 7 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu appears. 8 Press the U or V key to select [Counter Limit]. 9 Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select the item for which you want to set the default restriction on the number of sheets, and then press the OK key. Copy Restriction:D b (1 - 9999999) **123456* 11 Use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets, and then press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to Counter Limit. 12 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions on the number of sheets. OPERATION GUIDE 11 11-29 Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time. Types of the counts are as follows. Item Detail Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can also use [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check the number of pages used. Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned. FAX TX Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed. FAX TX Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions. * FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time. Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu 11-30 ] [ Login ] 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. OPERATION GUIDE Management NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set: a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account. Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] Total Accounting:a b 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 FAX TX Pages [ Exit ] • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Total Accounting]. 7 Press the OK key. The Total Accounting menu appears. 11 8 If you select [Printed Pages] or [Scanned Pages], press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items. Copy/Print Pages:C b Copy: 1/3 1234567 9 OPERATION GUIDE Press the U or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts, and then press the OK key. After confirming the content, press the OK key. The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu. 11-31 Management Total Accounting:a b 1 Printed Pages 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset ********************* [ Exit ] Reset counter. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting [ Yes ] [ No 10 To reset the counter, press the U or V key to select [Counter Reset]. 11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. ] 12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Total Accounting menu. Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu 11-32 ] [ Login ] 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. OPERATION GUIDE Management NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set.:a b 4 Each Job Account ********************* 5 Account List 6 Default Setting [ Exit ] Each Job Account: a b k Osaka GUI DESIGN ********************* k Kyoceramita k UI R&D DEPT. Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset [ Exit ] • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Each Job Account]. 7 Press the OK key. The Each Job Accounting menu appears. 11 8 Press the U or V key to select the account of which you want to check counts. 9 Press the OK key. A menu for the account appears. 10 Press the U or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts, and then press the OK key. If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for which you want to check printed page counts, and then press the OK key. Press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items. OPERATION GUIDE 11-33 Management Copy/Print Pages:C b Copy: 1/3 1234567 Limit:1234567 If you select [Scanned Pages], press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items. If the number of output sheets is restricted by an account management function, the upper limit on the number of output sheets is also displayed. 11 After confirming the content, press the OK key. The screen returns to the menu for the account. Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b 1 Printed Pages 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset ********************* [ Exit ] Yes ] [ No [Counter Reset]. 13 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Reset counter. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [ 12 To reset the counter, press the U or V key to select ] 14 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the account. 11-34 OPERATION GUIDE Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size. Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] Login User Name L b ******************* Login Password: [ Menu OPERATION GUIDE ] [ Login ] 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [User/Job Account], and then press the OK key. 3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for the default login user name and password. 11-35 11 Management NOTE: User/Job Account:a b 1 User Login Set. 2 Job Account.Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] Job Account.Set: a b 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account. Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] Print. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting [ 11-36 Yes ] [ No • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters. • If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to select the authentication destination. 4 In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V key to select [Job Account. Set.]. 5 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu appears. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Account. Report] and then press the OK key. 7 In the confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left Select key). A job accounting report is printed. ] OPERATION GUIDE Management Checking the Counter You can check the number of pages printed and scanned. The number is counted by the following items: Item Printed Pages Description By Function You can check the number of pages copied, faxed*, and printed, and the total number of pages used. By Paper Size You can check the number of pages printed for each paper size. Scanned Pages * You can check the number of pages copied, faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the total number of pages used. FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. Sys. Menu/Count.:a b 1 Report 2 Counter ********************* 3 System [ Exit ] a b Counter: 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages [ Exit OPERATION GUIDE Exit Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V key to select [Counter], and then press the OK key. 11 3 Press the U or V key to select [Printed Pages] or [Scanned Pages], and then press the OK key. ] a b Printed Pages: 1 by Function ********************* 2 by Paper Size [ 1 If you select [Printed Pages], select [by Function] or [by Paper Size] in the next screen, and then press the OK key. ] 11-37 Management Printed Pages: Copy: 1234567 11-38 C b 1/4 4 Press the Y or Z key to check the count. 5 After completing checking the count, press the OK key. The screen returns to the menu for the account. OPERATION GUIDE Appendix • • • • • Optional Equipment .........................................Appendix-2 Character Entry Method...................................Appendix-5 Paper ...............................................................Appendix-9 Specifications .................................................Appendix-18 Glossary.........................................................Appendix-23 OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-1 Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine. Document Processor Expansion Memory Paper Feeder Document Processor (DP-110) Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying. For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-45. Paper Feeder (PF-100) Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s double cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1. Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. You can select additional memory module from 128, 256, 512, or 1024 MB. The maximum memory size is 768 MB. Appendix-2 OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory. Precautions for Handling the Memory Module Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic wrist strap, if possible, when you install the memory module. Installing the Memory Module OPERATION GUIDE 1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable. 2 Remove the right cover with a piece of metal similar to coin. 3 Remove the screws and the memory slot cover as shown in the figure. Appendix-3 4 Remove the memory module from its package. 5 Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket, carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place. Then, push down the memory module to secure. CAUTION: Before inserting a memory module in the machine, make sure that the machine is switched off. 6 Push down the memory module to secure. 7 Reinstall the right cover. Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module, remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then, carefully push out the two socket clamps. Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove. Verifying the expanded memory To verify that the memory module is working properly, test it by printing a status page. Appendix-4 OPERATION GUIDE Character Entry Method In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters. Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters. 1 7 2 3 4 6 5 1. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s). 2. Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of the line, the character to the left of it is deleted. 3. Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen. 4. Cursor Keys Use these to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list. 5. Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter. 6. Reset Key Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen. 7. Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is displayed) OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-5 Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters, the following three types are available: ABC 123 Symbols To enter alphabets. To enter numerals. To enter symbols. In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right Select key) to select the type of characters you want to enter. File name input: OsakaSD3* [ 123 Text ] Current character type [ ABC Text ] [ 123 Text ] Each time you press [Text] (the Right Select key), the character type switches as follows: ABC, 123, Symbol, ABC ... a b Symbols: [ Text ] NOTE: By pressing on the numeric keys while entering characters, you can directly display the Symbols screen. Appendix-6 OPERATION GUIDE Entering Characters After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters. Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed. Key * OPERATION GUIDE Entry mode Available characters Alphabetic/Symbol .@-_/:¯1 Numeric 1 Alphabetic/Symbol abcABC2 Numeric 2 Alphabetic/Symbol defDEF3 Numeric 3 Alphabetic/Symbol ghiGHI4 Numeric 4 Alphabetic/Symbol jklJKL5 Numeric 5 Alphabetic/Symbol mnoMNO6 Numeric 6 Alphabetic/Symbol pqrsPQRS7 Numeric 7 Alphabetic/Symbol tuvTUV8 Numeric 8 Alphabetic/Symbol wxyzWXYZ9 Numeric 9 Alphabetic/Symbol . , - _ ’ ! ? (space) 0 Numeric 0 Alphabetic/Symbol Switch between upper-/lowercase Numeric * or . (decimal point)* Alphabetic/Symbol Numeric # '*' is entered when [123] is selected in the character type selection, or '.' is entered when only numerals are entered and no character type is selected. Appendix-7 Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it. If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there, spaces are automatically entered in between. Entering Symbols a b Symbols: [ Text Press [Text] (the Right Select key) or # on the numeric keys to display the Symbols screen. Use cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter and then press the OK key. ] Entry When [Select Character] Is Selected in Login Operation Settings In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled, the character entry method may vary depending on the settings. (Refer to Login Operation on page 8-55.) Login User Name: a b Kyocer* *abcdefghijklmnopqrst uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO [ Next ] If a character palette appears on the screen, use cursor keys to select the desired character from the displayed characters, and then press the OK key to enter it. NOTE: Numerals can be entered directly by pressing numeric keys. Appendix-8 OPERATION GUIDE Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source. Cassette Supported types Supported paper sizes Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6, B6, ISO B5, Envelope C5, 16K, Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356mm (4-1/8 x 5-13/16 to 8-1/2 x 14 inches) No. of sheets 250 (80g/m2) Optional paper feeder Supported types Supported paper sizes Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Executive, B6, ISO B5, Envelope C5, 16K, Custom (148 x 210 to 216 x 356mm (5-13/16 x 8-5/16 to 8-1/2 x 14 inches) No. of sheets 250 (80g/m2) Multi Purpose tray (MP tray) Supported types Plain, , Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Vellum, Letterhead, Color (Colour), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 Supported paper sizes Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16k No. of sheets 50 (80g/m2) Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to 356 mm Thick paper A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6, B6, ISO B5, 16K 1 Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to 356 mm Postcards Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard) OPERATION GUIDE Postcards (100 × 148 mm) Return postcard (148 × 200 mm) 15 Appendix-9 Supported types Envelopes Supported paper sizes ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 No. of sheets 1 Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to 356 mm Transparency (OHP film) Appendix-10 Letter, A4 1 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix. Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled. Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output. Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections for further details. Criteria Weight Specifications Cassettes: 60 to 120 g/m2 Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2 Thickness 0.086 to 0.110 mm Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2° Moisture content 9% Grain direction Long grain (paper supply direction) Pulp content 80% or more NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust. We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications. OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper. Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit. Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum. Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers. Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine. Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90° ± 0.2°. Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray B6 (128 × 182 mm) Letter ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) Legal Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2") Statement * Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8") Executive Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2") Oficio II Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 × 7 1/2") A4 (297 × 210 mm) Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) A5 (210 × 148 mm) Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm) A6 (105 × 148 mm) * Hagaki (100 × 148mm) B5 (257 × 182 mm) Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm) Folio (210 × 330 mm) Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) 16K (273 × 197 mm) Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) Size Entry (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm) * Appendix-12 Except for the optional cassettes. OPERATION GUIDE Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly. The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g/m2 for the cassettes and between 60 and 220 g/m2 for the multi purpose tray. Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm. Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres. Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast. Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%. To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations. • Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place. • Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while. • Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors. • Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours. • Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness. Other Paper Specifications Porosity: The density of the paper fibers Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams. OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-13 Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray. Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together. Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies. Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself. Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture. Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test. • Glossy paper • Watermarked paper • Paper with an uneven surface • Perforated paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media. The following paper and media can be used. • Transparency (OHP film) • Rough • Vellum • Labels • Recycled • Preprinted • Bond • Cardstock • Color (Colour) • Prepunched • Letterhead • Envelope • Thick • High Quality • Custom 1 to 8 Appendix-14 OPERATION GUIDE When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper. Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper. Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper. Transparency (OHP film) Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions. Criteria Specifications Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2° To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine. If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected. Cardstock Burrs Burrs Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams. Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices). Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-15 Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes. Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them. Keep the following points in mind. Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine. Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window. If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once. To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the top tray at once. Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams. NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters. Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray. For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure. When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble. Top sheet Adhesive layer Carrier sheet Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of labels may cause more problems. The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure. Appendix-16 OPERATION GUIDE Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output. Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications. Item Specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m² Basis weight (overall paper weight) 104 to 151 g/m² Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite) Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F). Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 9 of the Appendix. The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars. Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness may be considered separately. NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality. OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-17 Specifications NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. Machine Description Item FS-1028MFP FS-1128MFP Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, single drum system Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal) Original Feed System Fixed Paper Weight Front Cassette 60 to 120 g/m2 (Duplex: 60 to 120 g/m2) Multi Purpose Tray 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 µm (Cardstock) Front Cassette Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex) Multi Purpose Tray Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 Front Cassette Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4 (Duplex: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4) Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6 (Duplex: 7 1/4 × 10 1/2"/A5) Multi Purpose Tray Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4 Minimum: 3 5/8 × 6 1/2"/C5 Paper Type Paper Size Zoom Level Printing Speed Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments Fixed magnifications: 400%, 200%, 141%, 129%, 115%, 90%, 86%, 78%, 70%, 64%, 50%, 25% Simplex A4R/LetterR: 28/30 sheets/min B5R: 22 sheets/min Legal: 24 sheets/min A5R/A6R: 17 sheets/min Duplex A4R/LetterR: 14/15 sheets/min Legal: 12 sheets/min First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) When using the document processor: 8.7 ± 0.5 seconds When the document processor is not used: 6.9 ± 0.5 seconds Warm-up Time (22°C/ 71.6°F,60%) Power on 20 seconds Low Power 15 seconds Sleep 15 seconds Appendix-18 OPERATION GUIDE Description Item FS-1028MFP Paper Capacity FS-1128MFP Front Cassette 250 sheets (80 g/m2) Multi Purpose Tray 50 sheets (80 g/m2, plain paper, A4/Letter or less) Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m2) Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments) Image Write System Semiconductor laser (1 beam) Main Memory Standard: 256MB Interface Maximum: 768MB Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed) USB Host: 1 Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) Option KUIO/W slot: 1 Resolution 600 × 600 dpi Monthly Duty Average: 1500pages Operating Environment Maximum: 20000pages Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F Humidity 15 to 80 % Altitude 8,200 feet/2,500 m or less Brightness 1,500 lux or less Dimension (W × D × H) 19.4 × 16.1 × 14.4" 494 × 410 × 366 mm 19.4 × 16.9 × 17.6" 494 × 430 × 448 mm Weight (without toner container) 33 lb/15 kg 40 lb/18 kg Space Required (W × D) 25 3/16 × 25 7/16" 640 × 646 mm Power Requirement 120 V (60 Hz, more than 7.8 A) 220 to 240V (50/60 Hz, more than 4.0 A) OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-19 Description Item FS-1028MFP Power Consumption FS-1128MFP During printing 479.9 W (U.S.A./Canada), 470 W (European countries) 498 W (U.S.A./Canada), 484 W (European countries) During standby 83.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 83.4 W (European countries) 91.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W (European countries) Low power mode 82.6 W (U.S.A./Canada), 82.3 W (European countries) 91.2 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W (European countries) Sleep mode 8.0 W (U.S.A./Canada), 8.8 W (European countries) 10.5 W (U.S.A./Canada), 11.1 W (European countries) Power off 0W Options Document processor, Paper feeder (up to 2 units) Printer Item Description Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed. First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) 6.0 seconds or less Resolution Fine 1200, Fast 1200, 600 dpi, 300 dpi Operating System Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Vista x86 Edition, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows 2008 Server, Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition, Apple Macintosh OS 10.x Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed) USB Host: 1 Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) Standard Page Description Language Appendix-20 PRESCRIBE OPERATION GUIDE Scanner Item Description Operating System Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 System requirements IBM PC/AT compatible CPU: Celeron 600Mhz or higher RAM: 128MB or more HDD free space: 20MB or more Interface: Ethernet Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi File Format JPEG,TIFF,PDF, XPS Scanning Speed 1-sided: B/W 20 Images/min Color 7 Images/min 2-sided: B/W 11 Images/min Color 4 Images/min (A4 landscape, 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original) Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) USB2.0 (Hi-Speed USB) Network Protocol TCP/IP Transmission System PC transmission *1 *2 SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL E-mail transmission SNMP Scan to E-mail TWAIN scan*1 WIA scan*2 Available Operating System : Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista Available Operating System : Windows Vista OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-21 Document Processor (option) Item Description Original Feed Method Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum: Legal/A4 Minimum: Statement/A5 Paper Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 22 3/4 × 21 × 7 1/8" 455 × 338 × 93 mm Weight 3 kg or less Environmental Specifications Description Item FS-1028MFP Time to Low Power mode (default setting) 2 minutes Time to Sleep mode (default setting) 15 minutes Recovery time from Low Power mode 10 seconds or less Recovery time from Sleep mode 15 seconds or less Duplexing Standard Paper supply capability 100% recycled paper may be used. FS-1128MFP NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types. Appendix-22 OPERATION GUIDE Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network. Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed. Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep Mode A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum. Bonjour Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour. Default Gateway This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned. dpi(dots per inch) A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm). OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-23 EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal. Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic). FTP(File Transfer Protocol) A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet. Grayscale A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits. IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be between 0 and 255. IPP IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption. KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language) Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3. Multi Purpose (MP) Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels. NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services. NetWare Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems. Appendix-24 OPERATION GUIDE POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet. PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highlyfunctional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies. PPM (prints per minute) This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute. Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine. Send as E-mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers. Status Page The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source settings. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network. OPERATION GUIDE Appendix-25 TCP/IP (IPv6) TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission. TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name) A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers. The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software. USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0 A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer. WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application. Appendix-26 OPERATION GUIDE Index Numerics 1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-7 A Accessibility Appendix-23 Adjusting Density 5-13 Auto 3-10 Manual 3-10 Adjustment/Maintenance 8-87 Copy Density Adjustment 8-87 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-89 Developer Refresh 8-90 Send/Box Density 8-88 AppleTalk Appendix-23 Setup 2-22 Auto Low Power Mode 3-4 Auto Paper Selection Appendix-23 Auto Sleep 3-5, Appendix-23 B Bonjour Appendix-23 Bundled Items 2-2 Buzzer 8-6 C Cassette Loading Paper 2-29 Paper Size and Media Type 8-13 CD-ROM 2-2 Changing Language 2-7, 8-2 Cleaning Separator 9-5 Slit Glass 9-2 Color Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection 5-15 Color mode Color Selection (Copy) 8-34 Combine Mode OPERATION GUIDE 2-in-1 Mode 4-11 4-in-1 Mode 4-12 Page Boundary Lines 4-13 COMMAND CENTER 2-25 Connecting LAN Cable 2-5 Power Cable 2-7 USB Cable 2-7 Connection Method 2-3 Continuous Scan Copy 4-15 Send 5-16 Copy Adjusting Density 3-10 Collate Copying 3-17 Duplex Copying 3-14 Offset Copying 3-17 Originals 4-2 Selecting Image Quality 3-11 Setup 8-56 Zoom Copying 3-12 Copy Settings 8-56 Auto Paper Selection 8-58 Paper Selection 8-57 Quick Setup Registration 8-60 Copying Functions 4-1 Counting the Number of Pages Printed Each Job 11-32 Printing a Report 11-35 Total Job 11-30 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11-30 D Date/Timer 8-92 Auto Panel Reset 8-106 Date Format 8-95 Date/Time 8-92 Low Power Timer 8-108 Time Zone 8-97 Default 8-30 Collate/Offset 8-42 Color Selection (Copy) 8-34 Continuous Scan 8-31 Density 8-37 EcoPrint 8-43 E-mail Subject/Body 8-40 Index-1 File Format 8-36 File Name 8-39 Original Image 8-32 Original Orientation 8-30 Scan Resolution 8-33 Zoom 8-38 Default Gateway Appendix-23 Default Screen 8-5 Density Adjustment Copy 3-10 Send 5-13 Destination 8-112 Adding 8-112 Adding a Group 8-118 Choosing by One-Touch Key 3-30 Choosing from the Address Book 3-28 Editing 8-122 One-touch Key 8-124 Search 3-28 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-30 Device 7-20 Checking Status 7-20 Configuring 7-21 DHCP Appendix-23 Document Box 6-1 Quick Setup Registration 8-66 Document Processor Appendix-2, Appendix-22 How to Load Originals 2-46 Loading Originals 2-45 Not Supported Originals 2-45 Part Names 2-45 Supported Originals 2-45 dpi Appendix-23 Duplex 3-14, 8-74 E EcoPrint Mode Appendix-24 Copy 4-10 Print 8-72 E-mail Send as E-mail 3-21 Emulation Appendix-24 Selection 8-69 Index-2 Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-18 Entry Body 5-18 File Name 4-18, 5-17 Subject 5-18 Error Handling 8-28 Error Messages 10-5 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 F File Format 5-10 File Name 4-18 FTP Appendix-24 FTP Encrypted TX 5-23, 5-24 G Grayscale 5-15, Appendix-24 I Image Quality Copy 3-9 Send 5-12 Interface Block 8-146 IP Address Appendix-24 IPP Appendix-24 J Job Available Status 7-2 Canceling 3-31, 7-19 Checking History 7-8 Checking Status 7-2 Pause and Resumption 7-19 Sending the Job Log History 7-13 Job Accounting 11-13 Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 1120 Restricting the Use of the Machine 1122 Job Finish Notice 5-21 Copy 4-16 Send 5-21 OPERATION GUIDE K Raw Port 8-135 SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-135 SNMP 8-135 TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-129 TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-129, 8-132, 8-133 KPDL Appendix-24 L Label Appendix-16 LAN Cable Connecting 2-5 Login 3-6, 11-5 Logout 3-6, 11-5 Low Power Mode 3-5 Low Power Timer 8-108 M Management 11-1 Job Accounting 11-13 User Login Administration 11-2 Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-24 Paper Size and Media 2-41, 8-15 Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types of Destinations ) 3-30 N NetBEUI Appendix-24 NetWare 8-130, Appendix-24 Setup 8-130 Network Setup 2-12 Network Cable 2-4 Connecting 2-5 Network Interface 2-4 Network Security 8-138 Network Setup AppleTalk 2-22 FTP (Reception) 8-135 HTTP 8-135 HTTPS 8-135 IPP over SSL 8-136 LAN Interface 8-128 LDAP 8-135 LPD 8-135 NetBEUI 8-135 NetWare 8-130 POP3 (E-mail RX) 8-135 OPERATION GUIDE O Operation Panel 1-2 Option Document Processor Appendix-2 Expansion Memory Appendix-2 Overview Appendix-2 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 Optional Functions 8-151 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2-45 Placing on the Platen 2-44 Original Orientation Copy 4-8 Document Processor 4-8 Send 5-8 Original Size Indicator Plates 2-44 Original Size Selection Send 5-2 Originals Copy 4-2 Custom 8-8 Setup 8-8 Size Selection 4-2, 5-2 P Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix-12 Auto Selection 8-23 Before Loading 2-28 Cassette 8-13 Custom 8-11 Default Paper Source 8-22 Loading Envelopes 2-34 Loading in the Cassettes 2-29 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-32 Multi Purpose Tray 8-15 Setup 8-8 Size and Media 2-38, Appendix-9 Index-3 Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-14 Specifications Appendix-11 Weight 8-17 Paper Feeder Appendix-2 Paper Jam 10-11 Cassette 1 10-12 Cassette 2 10-12 Document Processor 10-16 Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-15 Jam Location Indicators 10-11 Multi Purpose Tray 10-15 Precaution 10-11 Paper Selection 4-4 Cassette 4-4 Multi Purpose Tray 4-5 Part Names 1-1 Platen Placing Originals 2-44 POP3 Appendix-25 PostScript Appendix-25 Power Cable Connecting 2-7 Power Off 3-3 Power On 3-2 PPM Appendix-25 Preparation 2-1 Preparing Cables 2-4 Printer Setup 8-69 Printer Driver Appendix-25 Printer Settings 8-69 Copies 8-75 CR Action 8-78 Duplex 8-74 EcoPrint 8-72 Emulation 8-69 Form Feed Timeout 8-77 LF Action 8-77 Orientation 8-76 Override A4/Letter 8-73 Printing 3-18 Printing from Applications 3-18 Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-81 Font List 8-82 Network Status Page 8-83 Service Status Page 8-83 Index-4 Status Page 8-81 Transmission Result Reports 8-85 Product Library 2-2 Q Quick Setup Screen Changing Registration 8-60, 8-62, 8-66 R Replacement Toner Container 9-5 Waste Toner Box 9-5 Resolution Appendix-19, Appendix-20 Restarting the System 8-127 S Scan Resolution 5-14 Default settings 8-33 Send File Format 5-10 Image Quality 5-12 Original Size Selection 5-2 Sending Size Selection 5-4 Setup 8-62 Sending Send as E-mail 3-21 Send to Folder (FTP) 3-25 Send to Folder (SMB) 3-25 Sending E-mail 2-26 Sending Functions 5-1 Sending Settings 8-62 Quick Setup Registration 8-62 Sending Size Selection 5-4 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-30 Separator Cleaning 9-5 Setting Date and Time 2-9 Setup AppleTalk 2-22 Copy 8-56 Date/Timer 8-92 NetWare 8-130 Network 8-128 OPERATION GUIDE Printer 8-69 Send 8-62 Sleep 3-5 Slit Glass Cleaning 9-2 SMTP Appendix-25 Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Specifications Document Processor Appendix-22 Environmental Specifications Appendix-22 Machine Appendix-18 Printer Appendix-20 Scanner Appendix-21 Specifying Destination 3-28 Status / Job Cancel 7-1 Status Page 8-81, Appendix-25 Subnet Mask Appendix-25 Switching the Language 2-7, 8-2 Switching Unit of Measurement 8-27 System Menu 8-1 T TCP/IP Appendix-25 Toner Container Replacement 9-5 TWAIN Appendix-26 U Unusable Time 8-109 USB Appendix-26 USB Cable Connecting 2-7 USB Interface 2-4 USB Memory OPERATION GUIDE Printing Documents 6-2 Removing 6-6 Saving Documents 6-4 User Login Administration 11-2 Adding 11-6 Changing Properties 11-9 Enabling/Disabling 11-2 Login 11-5 Logout 11-5 Unknown login user name Job 11-11 W Waste Toner Box Replacement 9-5 WIA Appendix-26 WSD Scan 5-19 X XPS File formats 5-10, 8-36 Printing documents stored in Removable USB Memory 6-2 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6-4 Z Zoom Copying Auto Zoom 3-12 Manual Zoom 3-12 Preset Zoom 3-12 Zoom Mode Copy 3-12, 5-6 Send 5-6 Index-5 Index-6 OPERATION GUIDE A1 First Edition 2009.7
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Page Count : 439 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePage Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:6ef6b7da-663b-419a-805e-ed509bf22dd5 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.0 Modify Date : 2010:05:10 09:38:05+02:00 Create Date : 2009:06:03 12:53:16Z Metadata Date : 2010:05:10 09:38:05+02:00 Document ID : uuid:9fcb4b17-4379-4bb9-9d24-e62ef769f974 Instance ID : uuid:cb979d26-d9a0-47f8-9fa6-5554d6ca93bf Format : application/pdf Title : FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP Creator : KYOCERA Description : OPERATION GUIDE Author : KYOCERA Subject : OPERATION GUIDEEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools